Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Instruction manual
Version 3.5
November 2005.
http://www.milltronics.net/
INTRODUCTION
This guide describes the principles of this device Centurion 5, 6 and 7. From an operator perspective, there is no visible difference. The functionality of the same in all of these machines. Equipment Centurion 7 offers increased performance, more memory and expedited processing of data. When referring to Centurion 7 in this guide is also meant Centurion 5 and 6. Centurion 7 in the base configuration with five controlled axes: X, Y, Z, A and B. This guide assumes that the tool moves relative to the workpiece. Part of this guide devoted to programming, is divided into two sections: the text dialog programming and programming. The section of the dialog programming is designed to, first, to explain the different menus, screen messages, and the general sequence of operations. Detailed explanations of each function are described in the section on codes of M & G, background information should be viewed in this section.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................ii TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................iii DETERMINATION OF AXES ......................................................................................................1 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................2 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................3 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................4 SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ..........................................................................5 Block ...........................................................................................................................................5 Program .......................................................................................................................................6 SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE ..........................................................................6 The main program, program, and standard routines ...................................................................6 Ranges format commands............................................................................................................7 SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE..........................................................................7 Format commands for the axes: M and G codes..........................................................................8 SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION ...............................................................................9 The front panel of Centurion 7 ..................................................................................................10 F1 (Home) Home Screen - The starting position.......................................................................13 F10 (Here) Starting position - current position..........................................................................13 F2 (JOG) Main screen - pulsatory movement............................................................................14 F3 (HDW) Main screen - Flywheel ..........................................................................................15 F4 (Run) Main screen - Implementation....................................................................................19 F9 (Halt / Resum) Main screen - Implementation - Stop / Resume ..........................................22 F2 (Old) Main-Run-Old (Main screen - Implementation - Existing Program) ........................22 F3 (Block) Main-Run-Block (main screen - Implementation - Block).....................................22 F4 (OStop) Main-Run-OStop (Main screen - Implementation - Additional Stop)....................22 F5 (BSkip) Main-Run-BSkip (Main screen - Implementation - Pass Block) ...........................22 F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping) .................................23 F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Distance)...........24 F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Bug) ..............24 F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Graphical display).......................................................................................................................................25 F1 (Rot) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Rot (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Turn) ...........................................................................................................................26 F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Pan) ............................................................................................................................27 F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind (The main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - Create window).............................................................................................28 F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Auto-scaling) ..............................................................................................................29 F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom-(Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - zoom out)....................................................................................................................29 F6 (Zoom +) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom + (main screen - Implementation - Display Graphic display - zoom).............................................................................................................29 F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Limit (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Borders).......................................................................................................................29
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zone (Main screen - Implementation-Display - Graphic display - security zone)..............................................................................................................29 F9 (Coord) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Coord (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - coordinate) .................................................................................................................29 F10 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Fresh (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Update) .......................................................................................................................29 Help (Clear) (Help (Clear)) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Clear (Main screen - Implementation Display - Graphic display - Clear).............................................................................................30 F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag (main screen - Implementation - mapping - Diagnostics) ...30 F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Vnutriplatny switch)........................................................................................................................................31 F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - InExit to the shell)...........................................................................................................................................31 F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu (main screen - Implementation - Menu) .....................................32 F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry (Main screen - Implementation - Idle)...............................................33 F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW (Main screen - Implementation - Flywheel)..............................33 Help (TlSet) Main-Run-TlSet (Main screen - Implementation - Configuration tool)...............34 F5 (MDI) Main-MDI (Main Screen - Manual data entry).........................................................34 F1 (Gcode) Main-MDI-Gcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - G-codes) .........................35 F2 (Mcode) Main-MDI-Mcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - M-codes)........................37 F6 (Displ) Main-Displ (Main Screen - Display)........................................................................38 F7 (Parms) Main-Parms (Main screen - Options) .....................................................................39 F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup (main screen - Options - Settings) ...........................................40 F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec (Main screen - Options - Settings - Accuracy) ..................42 F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power (Main screen - Options - Settings - Power) .................43 SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION...........................................................................139 Tool Changer Information (information about the structure of the tool change)......................47 SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION.............................................................................10 F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis (main screen - Options - Preferences - Axis)....................50 F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc (Main screen - Options - Settings - Other).......................57 Basic Machine Info (Basic information about the machine) ....................................................58 Software Options (Options software)........................................................................................64 CAD Parameters (Parameters CAD).........................................................................................67 Post M codes Table (Table future M-code)...............................................................................67 European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions (descriptions of the parameters and the functioning of European codes).................................................................................................68 F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction Correction of the feed rate)........................................................................................................70 Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................72 F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the flywheel)......................................................................................................72 Exit = Exit.................................................................................................................................73 F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction Correction of the spindle)..........................................................................................................73 Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................74
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F7 (BSC) Main-Parms-Setup-BSC (Home Screen - Options - Settings - Correction to the ballscrew pair)..................................................................................................................................74 F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-DOS (Main screen - Options - Preferences - Tip DOS)............75 F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord (Main screen - Options - Contact)..........................................76 F3 (TOOL) Main-Parms-Tool (main screen - Options - Tools)................................................78 F4 (D Off) Main-Parms-D Off (Home Screen - Options - Correction in diameter)..................79 F5 (H Off) Main-Parms-H Off (Home Screen - Options - length compensation).....................80 F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save (Home Screen - Options - Save)..................................................80 F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load (Main screen - Options - Load)..................................................81 F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog (Main screen - Options - Program) .............................................81 F9 (CTRL) Main-Parms-CTRL (Main screen - Options - CTRL)............................................85 Serial Port Data (serial data)......................................................................................................89 Digitizing Parameters (Parameters digitizing)...........................................................................91 F10 (User) Main-Parms-User (main screen - Options - User) ..................................................93 F8 (Prog) Main-Prog (main screen - the Program) ...................................................................94 F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text (main screen - Program - Text mode).............................................95 F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit)...........................96 Terms of text editing..................................................................................................................96 Writing and editing text.............................................................................................................96 Definitions of keys.....................................................................................................................98 F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Block). 98 F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr (Main screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Cursor).......................................................................................................................................99 F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Word) ........................................................................................................................................99 F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Other) ..................................................................................................................................................100 F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Paste).........102 F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Delete) . . .102 HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Check) ..................................................................................................................................................102 F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - New) ...................103 F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Old) .........................103 F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - Any) .....................103 F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu (main screen - Program - Text mode - Menu).................104 F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode).............................105 F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit (main screen - Program - Interactive mode-Edit)................106 Definitions of Key editing ......................................................................................................107 Definitions of key conservation / I...........................................................................................110 F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - New).........111 F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old (Main Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Old) ..............111 F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Any)...........111 Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode)..............................................111 F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - Menu)......113 F9 (Verf) Main-Verf (Main screen - Check) ..........................................................................114
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block (Main Screen - Checking - Power) ..........................................118 F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop (Main screen - Testing - Additional Stop)..............................118 F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip (Main Screen - Check - Missing the block).............................118 F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ (Main Screen - Check - Displays) .............................................118 F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Distance)......................119 F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error (Home Screen - Check - Displays - Error) ......................119 F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Graphic display) ....119 F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag (main screen - Check - Displays - Diagnostics) .................120 F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry (Main Screen - Check - Idle) ..........................................................120 F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt (Main Screen - Checking - Stop) F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum (Main screen - Validity - Renewal) ......................................120 F10 (Util) Main-Util (Main Screen - Utilities) .......................................................................121 F1 (Probe) Main-Util-Probe (Home Screen - Utilities - Sensor).............................................121 F2 (XyDig) Main-Util-XyDig (Main Screen - Utilities - Digitize XY)..................................123 F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files (Main Screen - Utilities - Files) ...................................................124 F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load (Main Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Download) ...........124 F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save (Home Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Conservation).......126 F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Rename) ...............126 F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy (Home Screen - Utilities - Files - Copy)............................126 F5 (Ram) Main-Util-Files- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Files - RAM) ...................126 F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Erase).............................126 F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232 (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232) ..........................................126 F1 (COM1 or COM 2).............................................................................................................126 F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send (Home Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Send)........................127 F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Get)........................127 F7 (Ram) Main-Util-RS232-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - RS232 - RAM) ..........128 F5 (Tlchg) Main-Util-Tlchg (Main Screen - Utilities - Tool change).....................................128 F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC) .................................................129 F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Fast mode).......................130 F1 (RS232)...............................................................................................................................131 F2 (File) (File)..........................................................................................................................131 F3 (Disk) (Disk).......................................................................................................................131 F4 (Any) (Any)........................................................................................................................131 F5 (Old) (Existing)...................................................................................................................131 F6 (Ram ) (RAM) ...................................................................................................................131 F1 (First) (First).......................................................................................................................131 F2 (Block) (Block)...................................................................................................................131 F3 (Tool) (tool)........................................................................................................................131 F4 (Cont) (Continued) .............................................................................................................131 F9 (Skip) (Skip).......................................................................................................................131 F10 (Mirr) (Mirror)..................................................................................................................132 F3 (Fast) (Fast Track) .............................................................................................................132 F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Implementation)..............133 F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC - Check).............................133 F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info (Home Screen - Utilities - Information)..........................................134
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Standard) .......................134 F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys (Main Screen - Utilities - Statistics - System) ..........................135 F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp (Main Screen - Utilities - Details-Front) .....................................136 F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path (Main Screen - Utilities - Information - Directions) .............137 F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Time) ......................138 F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Statistics - RAM)....................139 F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag (main screen - Utilities - Statistics - Diagnosis) ...................139 F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank (Home Screen - Utilities - Blank)..............................................140 F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command (Home Screen - Utilities - Team) .............................140 Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV (Main Screen - Utilities - Reverse the screw) ..................140 SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA ...........................................................................141 Installing the software..............................................................................................................143 F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - the Regulations) ..................................................................................................................................................144 F2 (Mill) Main-Prog-Conv-Mill (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Milling)......145 F1 (Start) Mill-Start (Milling - Start) ......................................................................................145 F2 (Geom) Mill-Geom (Milling - Geometry) .........................................................................147 F1 (Line) Mill-Geom-Line (Milling - Geometry - Line) ........................................................148 F2 (Arc) Mill-Geom-Arc (Milling - Geometry - Doug)..........................................................152 F3 (Tangs) Mill-Geom-Tangs (Milling - Geometry - Tangent) .............................................155 F4 (CGen) Mill-Geom-CGen (Milling - Geometry - Generator circles).................................157 F7 (Islnd) Mill-Geom-Islnd (Milling - Geometry - Island) ....................................................158 F8 (E-Isl) Mill-Geom-E-Isl (Milling - Geometry - End of treatment of the island)................159 F3 (Misc) Mill-Misc (Milling - More options)........................................................................165 F4 (End) Mill-End (Milling - End) .........................................................................................165 F5 (Pockt) Mill-Pockt (Milling - Deep excavation) ...............................................................177 F1 (Setup) Mill-Pockt-Setup (Milling - Deep groove - Installation) ......................................177 F2 (Circ) Mill-Pockt-Circ (Milling - Deep groove - Round) ..................................................178 F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Clean) .........................179 F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Finishing) ..........................180 F3 (Rect) Mill-Pockt-Rect (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular) ........................................180 F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Clean) ................181 F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Finishing) .................182 F3 (Face) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Face (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Ends) ....................182 F4 (Manul) Mill-Pockt-Manul (Milling - Deep groove - Clean by hand)...............................183 F5 (Polyg) Mill-Pockt-Polyg (Milling - Deep groove - Polygonal) .......................................184 F6 (Frame) Mill-Frame (Milling - Frame) ..............................................................................185 F1 (Setup) Mill-Frame-Setup (Milling - Frame - Installation) ...............................................185 F2 (Circ) Mill-Frame-Circ (Milling - Frame - Round) ...........................................................186 F3 (Rect) Mill-Frame-Rect (Milling - Frame - Rectangle) .....................................................187 F5 (Poly) Mill-Frame-Poly (Milling - Frame - Polygon) .......................................................187 F7 (3dPkt) Mill-3dPkt (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions)......................................................188 F1 (Start) Mill-3dPkt-Start (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - Home) .................................188 F4 (End) Mill-3dPkt-End (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - End) ......................................190 F5 (3dArc) Mill-3dPkt-3dArc (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - three-dimensional arc) ...193
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F8 (CAD) Mill-CAD (milling - CAD) ....................................................................................197 F9 (Thred) Mill-Thred (Milling - Thread) ..............................................................................200 F3 (Drill) Drill (Drill) .............................................................................................................201 Boring .................................................................................................................................202 Drilling / Pause....................................................................................................................203 Drill / drill bits with a periodic output ................................................................................203 Struzhkolomnoe drilling .....................................................................................................204 Boring..................................................................................................................................205 Boring / Pause......................................................................................................................206 Boring 2...............................................................................................................................206 Accelerated boring...............................................................................................................207 Fine boring...........................................................................................................................207 Contact boring .....................................................................................................................208 Boring manual......................................................................................................................209 Tsekovanie ..........................................................................................................................210 Drilling holes to screw (Drill-Start-Tap).............................................................................211 Drilling holes for soft tapping on the right .........................................................................211 Drilling holes for soft tapping on the left.............................................................................212 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right.........................................................................213 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left...........................................................................213 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right with a periodic output bits..............................214 Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left with the conclusion of the periodic drills.........215 F2 (Pos) Drill-Pos (Drilling-positioning), F3 (Misc) Drill-Misc (Drilling - Options), F4 (Call) Drill-Call (Drilling - Call) .......................................................................................................215 F5 (End) (End) ........................................................................................................................219 F6 (CAD) Drill-CAD (Drilling - CAD) ..................................................................................219 F4 (Bolt) (Bolt) .......................................................................................................................228 F5 (TChng) Change Tool ........................................................................................................246 F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions) ...........................................................................................249 F7 (Call) (Call) ........................................................................................................................250 F8 (Spec) (Specifications) .......................................................................................................251 F1 (Parms) Spec-Parms (Specifications - Options) ................................................................252 F2 (Tools) Spec-Tools (Specifications - Tools) ......................................................................252 SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA...........................................................................142 F4 (Scale) Spec-Scale (Specification - Scale) ........................................................................255 F5 (Rot) Spec-Rot (Specifications - Turn)...............................................................................256 F6 (Mirr) Spec-Mirr (Specs - Mirror) .....................................................................................258 F7 (Flz) Spec-Flz (Specifications - Floating zero)..................................................................259 F8 (Text) Spec-Text (Specifications - Text) ...........................................................................260 F9 (Subs) (Sub) .......................................................................................................................261 F1 (Gosub) Subs-Gosub (Sub - Jump to a subroutine) ...........................................................262 SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA...........................................................................143 F2 (Start) Subs-Start (Sub - Run) ...........................................................................................263 F3 (End) Subs-End (Sub - Conclusion) ..................................................................................263 Example programs using subprograms ...................................................................................264
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
End of program .......................................................................................................................267 PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)...................................................................................268 G-codes ...................................................................................................................................268 Interpolation functions ............................................................................................................271 Positioning (G00) with rapid movement (modal) ...................................................................271 Positioning (G01) Movement of feed (modal) ........................................................................272 Determination of polar ............................................................................................................273 Circular interpolation (G02, G03)............................................................................................274 Corner rounding (, R)...............................................................................................................287 Bevel angle (, C)......................................................................................................................288 Contact Line ............................................................................................................................289 Screw cutting (G02, G03)........................................................................................................291 The team paused (G04)............................................................................................................292 Exact Stop (G09)......................................................................................................................292 Data Set incl. / Off. (G10, G11)...............................................................................................293 Cleaning the floating zero (G12).............................................................................................293 The plane XY (modal) (G17)...................................................................................................293 The plane XZ (modal) (G18)...................................................................................................293 The plane YZ (modal) (G19)...................................................................................................293 Inch size mode (Modal) (G20).................................................................................................293 Metric size mode (Modal) (G21).............................................................................................294 Enable / disable the safe zone (G22, G23)...............................................................................294 Automatic standard programs .................................................................................................294 Cleaning the round deep recesses (G24)..................................................................................295 Internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25)......................................................................296 Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves (G26)......................................................................298 Return to the zero point (G28, G29, G30)...............................................................................300 Z to the gap (G31)....................................................................................................................302 Z to the tool change (G32).......................................................................................................302 The processing cycle ends (G33).............................................................................................302 Cleaning deep rectangular grooves (G34)...............................................................................302 Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves (G35)..............................................................304 Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves (G36).................................................................307 Tapping (G39)..........................................................................................................................308 The cycle performance of the polygons (G666)......................................................................309 Correction of the cutting tool (G40, G41, G42).......................................................................312 The inner "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool................................................................316 Test sample details...................................................................................................................316 How to make a correction to the cavity...................................................................................321 Blocking the movement (G65).................................................................................................322 PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)..................................................................................269 Automatic correction of the cutting tool (G45, G46, G47)......................................................328 Examples of programs.............................................................................................................329 Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)...........................................................................331 Cancel scaling (G50) Set scaling (G51)...................................................................................332
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................................334 The coordinate system of the machine (G53)..........................................................................334 Work coordinate system (G54 - G59) (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9).......................................................335 The local coordinate system (G52)..........................................................................................335 One-way or one-time accelerated positioning (G60)...............................................................337 Exact stop mode (modal) (G61)...............................................................................................337 Tapping mode (modal) (G63)..................................................................................................337 Cutting mode (modal) (G64)...................................................................................................337 Calling the program (G65 P)....................................................................................................337 Rotate the coordinate system (G68) Cancel the rotation (G69)...............................................338 Turn in 3 dimensions (G0, G1, G2, G3, G68 and G69)...........................................................341 Scalable and then turns the part...............................................................................................342 Rotatable and scalable, then the item ......................................................................................343 Cancel mirroring (G70)............................................................................................................344 Install a mirrored display (G71)...............................................................................................344 Group cycles ...........................................................................................................................345 Execute bolt holes (G72).........................................................................................................351 The cycle of high-speed drill bits with a periodic output (G73)..............................................354 The cycle of the soft tapping on the left (G74)........................................................................355 Tsekovanie (G75).....................................................................................................................356 Cycle finish boring (G76)........................................................................................................357 Specialized drilling cycle (G77)..............................................................................................358 The cycle of boring manual (G78)...........................................................................................359 Cancellation of group cycle (G80)...........................................................................................359 Drilling cycle (G81).................................................................................................................360 Drilling cycle / pause (G82).....................................................................................................360 Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill (G83)......................................................361 The cycle of the soft tapping on the right (G84)......................................................................362 Boring Cycle (G85)..................................................................................................................363 The cycle accelerated boring (G86).........................................................................................364 Boring feedback loop (G87)....................................................................................................365 Rigid tapping cycle (G88)........................................................................................................367 Boring Cycle / Pause (G89).....................................................................................................369 PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)..................................................................................384 Absolute / incremental mode...................................................................................................372 Absolute mode (modal) (G90).................................................................................................372 Incremental mode (modal) (G91)............................................................................................373 Floating zero (G92)..................................................................................................................374 Feed mode with a time delay (G93).........................................................................................376 Submission of a minute (G94).................................................................................................376 Feed per revolution (G95)........................................................................................................377 Returning to the original level or the level of R (G98/G99)....................................................377 On. / Off. cylindrical display (G107).......................................................................................377 G271 (cleaning deep cavities) .................................................................................................380 Save / Restore Settings (G990/G991)......................................................................................383
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Read byte parameters (G995)..................................................................................................384 Write byte parameters (G996).................................................................................................384 Calling error (G997)................................................................................................................385 Beep (G998) ............................................................................................................................385 Special G-codes ......................................................................................................................385 SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES) ...........................................................386 Stop the program (M00)...........................................................................................................389 An optional stop (M01)............................................................................................................389 Skipping the block (/)...............................................................................................................389 Completion of the program (M02, M30, M99)........................................................................389 Spindle incl. / Off. (M03, M04, M05) ....................................................................................390 Tool change (M06) .................................................................................................................390 Coolant inc. / Off. (M07, M08, M09)......................................................................................390 Clip for rotary table (M10) .....................................................................................................390 Decompression on the turntable (M11)...................................................................................390 Tool changing device codes (M19-M28).................................................................................391 Lock Drive (M31)....................................................................................................................391 Canal (M32).............................................................................................................................391 Various M-codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60)...........................................391 Enable / disable graphics (M90, M91).....................................................................................391 Enable / disable scanning in 3 dimensions (M93, M94)..........................................................391 SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)...........................................................388 Tapered wall (M95).................................................................................................................393 SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)...........................................................387 Rounded walls (M96)..............................................................................................................396 Cleaning the deep recesses (M97)...........................................................................................401 Subroutine call (M98)..............................................................................................................402 The completion routines (M99)...............................................................................................402 Training routines .....................................................................................................................403 Performing routines.................................................................................................................404 Specialized M-codes ...............................................................................................................405 SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING ....................................................................407 Parametric link.........................................................................................................................407 Parametric team assignment ...................................................................................................407 PB (byte option) ......................................................................................................................407 Arithmetic Operators ..............................................................................................................408 Relational Operators ...............................................................................................................408 The operators of functions ......................................................................................................409 Mathematical expressions .......................................................................................................410 Conditionals ............................................................................................................................410 IF-THEN..................................................................................................................................410 WHILE-WEND.......................................................................................................................411 Operators of transfer ...............................................................................................................411 GOTO statements ....................................................................................................................412 CALL statement ......................................................................................................................412
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GOSUB and RETURN............................................................................................................413 Computational functions .........................................................................................................414 Time team ...............................................................................................................................417 Additional commands .............................................................................................................419 SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING....................................................................427 IPIN..........................................................................................................................................424 OPIN........................................................................................................................................424 Teams check details and digitizing .........................................................................................424 Contact Line.............................................................................................................................425 MOD (modulo operation)........................................................................................................426 SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING....................................................................408 ORIGIN (start address)............................................................................................................426 HOME (starting position)........................................................................................................427 SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS ...........................................................................430 SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS...........................................................................431 SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS...........................................................................484 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................486 Error Messages.........................................................................................................................486 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................487 Byte parameters ......................................................................................................................503 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................508 The actual parameters..............................................................................................................510 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................518 APPENDIX .................................................................................................................................511
xii
DETERMINATION OF AXES
All directions are oriented relative to the tool. The figure below shows the direction of X, Y and Z.
INTRODUCTION
The group of commands sent to the CNC work on the machine, called a program. With the help of a specific command tool is moved in a straight line or arc, and run the machine functions such as switching on / off coolant, tool change, or turn on / off spindle. The function of the tool along straight lines and arcs is called interpolation. Linear interpolation Circular interpolation
When you run the tool at a desired position of the CNC moves the tool in this situation by a regime of linear or circular interpolation. The position is given as a coordinate value in a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system. Coordinates
INTRODUCTION
There are following types of coordinate systems. A. The system of the machine
INTRODUCTION
The command to move the tool to the desired position is performed using the values of the coordinates, based in one of the above coordinate systems. Coordinate value is a single component of each axis, X, Y and Z. The coordinate values can be entered in absolute and incremental mode in. In absolute mode, the tool moves to the point the programmed distance from the zero point coordinate system. In incremental mode, the tool moves to the point the programmed distance from the current position of the tool.
Absolute mode
Incremental backup is
A set of commands at each stage of the sequence is called block. The program consists of a group of blocks for a series of movements of the machine. An additional number to identify each movement is block numberAnd the number of serving for the title of each program, called program number. Unit and the program has the following configuration. Block
Each unit begins with an additional accommodation and ends <CR> (carriage return).
END OF PROGRAM
Typically, the program number is specified at the beginning of the program and graduation from the program code (M99, M02, M30) - at the end of the program. They are not mandatory, however, may be advantageous to omit the code to the end of the programs that are used as a subroutine. Code completion of the program is supposed to enter at the end of the main program. The main program, program, and standard routines
If you want to process on the same path in several places on the details necessary to create a program path. It is called subroutine. If the main program there is "M98" or "Call" (subroutine call), the team routines are executed before executing the next block of the main program. Routines can be used to create libraries of frequently used paths machining, they can be stored anywhere in memory.
* These functions have the election decimal places. It can be any number of integer and decimal places, while the total number of digits to be placed in the field.
The following addresses can be used with a decimal point: X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F, P, Q, AA, AB, XC, YC, ZC, E, H, L, N, O, S and T. Min / max values for the axes of the standard systems Metric system The English system Degrees The smallest increment of Maximum 0.001 mm 99999.999 mm 0.0001 inch 99999.9999 in. 0.001 degrees 99999.999 degrees
The provisions of the axes are stored in floating point, so the digital team of more than 8 will be accepted.
CNC 7200/8200
10
2 3
4 5 6 7 8
RunTime (run time) During the test period, the program displays the estimated time of execution of production parts. When working in the program, it shows how much time has passed since the start of the program. All data on the periods of implementation of programs stored in the parameter "Job Time" ("time of manufacturing the same parts") (F7 Parms - F9 Ctrl). History Line (Story) History Line shows where you are in the program and how you got there. If you change the spreadsheet tool, history will show the Main-Parms-Tool-Edit. Active Program (active program) Active Program indicates the program in which you work or you are testing. If you are editing a program, it will show that the activated editing program. If you send a file via RS232, it will show that the program has been sent. Current Position (current position) Current Position - a position relative to the zero adjustment of the working Next Position (next position) If you are running a program or check out her next position (Next Position) is the position into which the machine. Distance (distance) Distance - the distance that machine is left to go until the completion of the action. The Function Keys (function keys) Illuminated function keys are active or available. Status Window (status window) The status window displays detailed information about the state of the control system. A detailed description is given below.
11
The scheme of the Status Window A 2 3 Button "\" changes to "/" to "\" every time the status window is updated. Comp: Correction to the tool radius (Left (Left), Right (R) or Cancelled (repealed)) Tool: The first two digits indicate the number of the active tool. The second two numbers in parentheses indicate the number of expected instrument. If you do not T14 M6, the expected number of tools will be 14. 4 The length of the tool. 5 The radius of the tool. 6 Plane and work offset (and the working plane correction): The plane can be XY (G17), ZX (G18) or YZ (G19). Working correction shows the current working correction G54 (0) ... G59 (9). 7 The gap, or plane R. 8 Interpolation Linear (Feed) (linear (feed)), Linear (Rapid) (linear (accelerated movement)), Circular (CW) (a circular (clockwise)) or Circular (CCW) (circular (counterclockwise)) 9 Feedrate: programmed feed rate and its unit of measurement (flow per minute in English system) ipm (inches / min) (flow per minute in the metric system) mmpm (mm / min), (feed per revolution in the English system) ipr (inches v / v), (feed per revolution of the metric system) mmpr (mm / rev) or (reverse flow) / minute or / sec (If the machine is in an accelerated mode, the units will always be in / min or mm / min.) 10 Feedrate override (feedrate override): Position switch feedrate and the resulting flow rate. If the machine is programmed to move faster than its maximum value, you will see the speed limit and the feed icon "*" next to the%. 11 Units (Units) (absolute) Abs or (incremental) Inc, and English (the English system of measurement) or Metric (Metric)
12
13
RunTime = Period Main-Jog = Main screen - pulsatory movement Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance ipm = inch / min Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Slow = slow; Fast = fast; Dist = distance; Tool = Tool; Exit = exit
With the help of the function buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the desired mode jog move. Use the F1 (slowly) selects a slow jog. Adjust the feed rate is activated, it can accelerate 14
RunTime = Period Main-HDW = Main screen - Flywheel Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter:
15
Note: F8 can be modified to preserve the correct position in the G92. F keys at the bottom of the screen are used to choose which axis will move when you turn the flywheel. With the switch feedrate determined the distance that will move each axis of the handwheel one click. With illuminated keys axis is determined, which will move the axis. F6 (Z-tool) used to set the correct length of the Z-axis tool in the tool table, or table Hparameters. In the flywheel can be placed in the tool spindle and move the zero point Z. You can then click on the button F6, which indicates an intention to enter the current position of Z as Hparameter correction of the length of the tool. CNC will give a clue as to position Z. After pressing the Enter (Enter), the current Z position is used for the length of the tool. Depending on the size of the auxiliary parameter "rather than the use of FLZ G54", G54 executes F8 key or the G92 for X or Y or Z in the current state of the machine. The operator shall be issued with respect to the axis of clues. It can be seen as "a challenge that position '. # # # # # #'." Note: The indicated distance refers to how the machine will move in one click flywheel.
16
17
With kromkoiskatelya diameter "on the X axis to move by hand wheel or jog feed to the edge of the details and press F8 (G54-X). Define a positive or a negative value kromkoiskatelya the desired zero point. Enter -0.25 for position X. The current position will be read as X -0,25. Repeat this procedure to the axis Y. To test the null value of the work of correction to choose F5 (manual data entry), type G0 (rapid movement) X0 Y0 (X and Y position to 0). Press Enter (Enter)And then Cycle Start (Start of cycle). The machine will be the current working position correction. Please note: Moving the machine will run in accelerated mode. The tool should be above all the parts, clutches, etc. For more information on floating zero, see p. 374, Section 4.
18
RunTime = Period Main-Run = Main screen - Perform Active = active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Old = the existing program; Block = block; Ostop = extra stops; Bskip = pass block; Displ = map; Menu = menu; Dry = idle; HDW = flywheel; Esc = exit; TlSet = configuration tool
When you see the above screen, press the F1 (Start), the following screen. (Note: if the machine is equipped with an automatic tool change, the operator receives a request for verification of the tool room, located in the spindle).
19
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Start = Main screen - Running-Start Active = Active Current = Next = current next Press the Cycle Start (beginning of the cycle) to start the program from the beginning. Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: First = first; Block = block; Tool = Tool; Abort = abort
F1 (first) is selected automatically when you receive this screen. So, if you want to run an active program from the beginning, press only Cycle Start (Start of cycle). Pressing the F2 (block) device management request to enter the desired number of blocks or sequences, and then click on Enter (Enter). If the button is pressed Cycle Start (The first cycle), an active program will start from the selected block. When you click on F3 (Tool), the control unit requests the tool number. After entering the number, clicking on the tool and Enter, Click on Cycle Start, And an active program will start with the number you want the tool, the following screen. Note: If the requested block number or tool is not found in the active program, the following window appears.
20
When you click on Cycle Start (Start of cycle) program runs from the beginning.
RunTime = Period Main-Run = Main screen - Perform Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: the left by / Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (accelerated movement) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Block = block; Ostop = extra stops; Bskip = pass block; Displ = display; Halt = Stop; HDW = flywheel; Esc = exit
This screen is the main startup screen with two new additions: the map unit number and F9 (Stop). It shows the current block to be executed by the program. Key F9 (Stop) is similar
21
22
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ = Main screen - Implementation-Display Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: Left res \ Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (accelerated movement) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Obs = vnutriplatny switch; Shell = output in the shell; Esc = exit
23
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ = Main screen - Displays the Running-Active = Active Current = Next = current next Following Error = error error Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Esc = exit
24
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear
Graphs in the NC are fully three-dimensional and displayed in the graphics area as long as the control device is in graphics mode. At the request of other maps in the graphics area of the window will appear with the requested data. At the end of the window with these features disappear, and the graphical display will be restored. The scales at the bottom and the left side of the screen used to control the size of the parts. If you change the scale on the lines dividing the screen will change accordingly. Division in the rulers expressed in units of the machine, in imperial system equal to the largest division of about one inch. In the metric system of dividing up the largest 10 mm. Parameter Runtime (Period), the top screen is essentially a timer that starts when the command is run Run Program (program implementation), and stops at the end of the program or when the program is terminated.
25
(F1-XY, F2-XZ, F3-Y2, F4-ISO) Press the F1, F2, F3 and F4 produced four standard turning parts: XY top, XZ Front, YZ side and isometric views. The index of orientation in the lower left corner of the screen indicates the current orientation of the parts. By pressing the keys F1 through F4 Index orientation is moved to its new position. Keys F5 to F10 are used to turn any of the selected axis in increments of 5 . Again, if a key is pressed, the index of the orientation is rotated to indicate the orientation of the display items. With the F5 and F6 turns the axis of X , using F7 and F8 - axis Y , and using the F9 and F10 - axis Z .
26
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical-Pan Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Block = block; Enter = input; Done = done
Crosshair that appears on the screen can be moved using the numeric keys or the arrow keys F7 F10. To perform the pan to move the cursor to a point on the screen, ie to the desired center of the screen and click on the F5 (Enter) (Enter) or Enter (Enter) key on your keyboard. The screen will shift to a new position, panning can be resumed. Use the ESC (Exit) cancels the pan function and returns to the screen Graph (graphic display). Crosshairs can also be used to verify the origin items to be displayed on the screen.
27
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical-Create Windows Active = Active Correction: canceled Total Dist = total distance Instrument: XDist = distance to the axis X Diameter: YDist = distance to the Y axis Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Enter = input; Done = done
Crosshair that appears on the screen can be moved using the numeric keys or the arrow keys F7 F10 (as well as in the pan). In order to increase through the window to move the cursor to the first corner of the window and press the F5 (Enter) (Enter) or click Enter (Enter). Then move the cursor up until the desired region of the details do not fall into a rectangular block as shown on the screen. Then click on Enter. The area enclosed in the block will now be displayed in full screen. After clicking on Enter window closes and you return to the graphical mode. Cross can be used to verify the origin and the distance between the elements in detail. XY coordinates in the lower left of the screen indicates the position of the cursor relative to the zero point of detail. XY coordinates in the bottom right indicate the size of the window. These numbers can be used for quick reference on the amount and details of the parameters.
28
29
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Diag = Main Screen-Display Performance-Diagnostics-Active = Active Enter the X-axis The output of the X axis Correction: canceled 01 Emergency Stop 01 Program Emergency Stop Instrument: Connecting rod 02 is turned off 02 coolant in the form of oil mist Length: Connecting rod 03 is included 03 Coolant splash Diameter: 04 Acceleration The rotation of the spindle 04 in a Plane: 05 Change Tool clockwise direction Clearance: 06 Failure of lubrication system The rotation of the spindle 05 Interpolation: linear (feed) 07 Waiting for the channel counterclockwise Submission: 08 Zero Speed The spindle 06 in the order Units: absolute / English system 09 Faulty Drive 07 The inclusion of a connecting rod Cycle: canceled 10 Rear Spindle 08 Change Tool Pause: (sec = seconds) 11 Digitization Resolution 09 relief Spindle: (rpm = r / min) The switch 12 of the original Conclusion 10 X 10 Coolant: Disabled Marker pulse 11 Locking Spindle Number details: Marker of the spindle 12 swivel clip
30
Note: The diagnostic screens will be different for machines with various options. The text appearing on screen - from the files and INP.XXX OUT.XXX, where XXX - this extension is to display the desired language on the screen. Files INP.XXX OUT.XXX and the base of the machine without options are located in the ROM (ROM). Files that match the options that may be on the machine, will be in the memory (RAM). The control unit first check the directory memory (RAM). If no files are found in it, the control unit will use the default files in the directory the ROM (ROM). Each axis has inputs and outputs, by pressing the F1 ... F6 buttons are shown, the inputs and outputs for the corresponding axis. Note: In machines with tool changer, etc. there are other diagnostic screens. F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Vnutriplatny switch) The key F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) will be displayed only on the access level 2 and above. F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) will be highlighted, it is only available if the current mapping - F1 (Next) or F2 (distance). It displays information about the motion control boards. F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) appears only in protected mode. F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - InExit to the shell) Key F9 (Exit to the shell) is available if the control device is located at the access level 2 and above. It will be released into the system DOS. To return to the machines to print exit (exit). F9 (Exit to the shell) appears only in protected mode.
31
RunTime = Period Main-Run-Menu = Main screen - Implementation - Menu Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Conversational file Centurion = File Correction: canceled Dialog Centurion Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Verf = check; Enter = avodah; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Drive = CD
To activate one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow keys and page turning to move the cursor to the desired program and press the F5 (input) or on the button Enter (Enter) key on your keyboard. The function menu can be accessed from other screens, but it works the same everywhere. When calling from the screens Run (Execute) or Verify (Test) selected program becomes active. When invoked with the selected program editing screen becomes editable. With the help of F1 (check) graphically checked the item on which the cursor is positioned. When you press F6 (switch) is displayed file size, date and time of last modification,
32
Two. Starting min / rev The total number of minutes of normal time, the program must comply with one turn the flywheel. The increase in supply (in inches / min) due to this factor will lead to the filing, in inches / turn the flywheel. This value must be approximately .0010 to our existing systems. Three. Start, max. inch / min This limits the flow rate, but it is run manually for valid response to the programmed low feed rates. Regulation of other parameters may cause flywheel mismatch error on the situation at speeds greater than 100 inches / min. This value must be equal to about 100 in our current system. 4. The coefficient on startup The coefficient for each click flywheel should be about 100 for our current system.
The coefficient of the start / Number of minutes / circulation at start proportional to the maximum allowable flow rate when manually started.
33
34
RunTime = Period Main-MDI = Main Screen - Manual data entry Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: MDI = Manual data entry GCode = G-codes; MCode = M-codes; Displ = map; Done = done
When you type functions, they are displayed in the MDI line at the bottom of the screen. After entering data, you must click on the Enter (Enter) to complete the unit. At a given point of beginning of the loop will execute a string MDI. In manual data entry by pressing the ESC (Exit), you can cancel any command MDI. With the F6 is called a normal graphic image, which was described above. If in manual data entry include graphics, display the extent of implementation will be graphically displayed all the action. F1 (Gcode) Main-MDI-Gcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - G-codes) Use the F1 (Gcode), the list of allowed G-code and a brief description of each. Pressing the F1 (Gcode) appears the following list of G-code. 00 Linear Rapid (Linear accelerated motion) 02 CW Arc 35 01 Linear Feed (Line feed) 03 CCW Arc
36
Note: A text file showing the allowed G-codes on the screen, - Gcodes.XXX, where XXX is the extension for that language. The device management first looks in the directory Gcodes.XXX RAM (memory). If the file is not found, he searched in the catalog ROM (ROM). F2 (Mcode) Main-MDI-Mcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - M-codes) Use the F2 (Mcode), a list of allowed M-codes with a brief description of each. 00 Program Stop (Stop the program) 02 End of Program 01 Optional Stop (Optional stop) 03 Spindle On CW
37
38
RunTime = Period Main-Parms = Main screen - Options Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Setup = setup; Coord = coordinates; Tool = Tool; D off = correction in diameter; H off = correction in the length; Save = save; Load = load; Prog = Programme; User = user; Done = done
39
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup = Main screen - Settings - Configure Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Level = level; Prec = accuracy; Power = power; Axis = axis; Misc = other; OVRs = correction; BSC = correction in the ball-screw pair; DOS = prompt DOS; Done = done
Note: The keys to F2 (Prec) to F9 (DOS) are displayed only if the control device is in secure mode prescribed by the code authentication. Machines require ID Authentication and Access levels for a number of display resolution or change the settings of the machine. ID authentication and access level can provide the manufacturer of the machine.
40
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Level = Main screen - Options - Settings-level Active = active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance VALIDATION CODE = code authentication Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Abort = elimination
Note: The parameters in the configuration sections are usually installed by the manufacturer of the machine. Changing these parameters can affect many functions and performance of the machine, it can be done only by qualified service personnel. Subject to entering the correct code, you can choose the following page.
41
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Prec = Main screen - Options - Settings-Precision Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Decimal precision Correction: canceled English Metric Instrument: Leading Leading End End Length: Cartesian Diameter: The angular Plane: Spindle Clearance: Feed Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; Done = done
The screen above shows some typical settings for the leading and trailing zeros for different coordinate systems. The number of the leading and trailing zeros are not limited, but there are some practical limits. If the numbers get too large, they will not fit in the space allotted to them on the screen. If they are smaller than the elements of feedback, they will not cause displacement. To change the setting press the F1 (Edit) (Edit). A number of the arrow keys, use 42
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Power = Main screen - Options - Settings-Power Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Changes in this section affect the inclusion of power Correction: canceled Type the front ... STANDARD Instrument: Panel UL ... no Length: The opening front panel (Cent7) Diameter: Video Mode Plane: The action items ... G20, the English system Clearance: Number of axles Interpolation: linear (feed) Keyboard with daisy ... no Submission: (ipm = inches / min)
43
Front Panel Type: (A type of front panel) UL Panel: (Panel UL) FP Control Port (Cent 7): (Aperture control front panel (Cent7)) Video Mode: (Video) Initial Units are: (Proactive units) Number of Axes: (Axles) Serial Keyboard: (Keyboard consistent connection)
Default settings: 640 x 350 for CRT and 800 x 600 for LCD monitors G20, the English system of measurement, or G21, the metric system to activate the inch or metric system. It can be from 1 to 5. Enables or disables the serial keyboard with daisy
The keyboard will transfer through the interface CLK / DATA, and not through the RS-232 interface. This means that the PC will recognize that the keyboard is present when you reboot and hangs with a message such as <PRESS F1 TO RESUME> (Press the F1 to resume.) The keyboard will always recognize the commands via RS-232 or CLK / DATA. If the appropriate command, which does not contain errors, obtained via an RS-232, will transfer via RS-232, rather than CLK / DATA. Similarly, you can switch back to the interface CLK / DATA. If the appropriate command, which does not contain errors, obtained via CLK / DATA, will transfer through the interface CLK / DATA, not the RS-232. Since the RS-232 interface is not so interlocked, as the interface CLK / DATA, the following additional requirements are placed in the RS-232 protocol. A. System administration commands are allowed only in response to the transfer, set the keyboard.
44
45
Primary HDW Encoder Sensor for use with a primary flywheel. Axis (Cent 6 and up) 7 for standard systems Cent 6, 8 for standard systems (AboutSubscribe the primary sensor Cent 7. Flywheel (Cent6 and above)) 2nd Handwheel Used for optional dual flywheel system Encoder Axis: (4 if there is an option) (AboutSubscribe 2nd sensor flywheel) 3rd Handwheel Used for optional dual flywheel system Encoder Axis: (5 if there is an option). (AboutSubscribe third sensor flywheel) New remote handwheel: Yes (yes)If you have the option of a new remote handwheel. (New remote flywheel) Remote HDW Encoder: Sensor for use with a remote fly-wheel. (Remote Sensor flywheel) 100% Rapid in Run: No (no) means that the correction of the feed rate will (100% faster impact on the accelerated movement. at work) Yes (yes) means that the correction of the feed rate will not impact on the accelerated movement of in operation. The accelerated movement of up to 100%. 100% Rapid in Dry-Run: No (no) means that the correction of the feed rate will (100% acceleration in the impact on the rapid move to idle mode. idle) Yes (yes) means that the correction of the feed rate has no effect on the accelerated move to idle mode. The accelerated movement of up to 100%
46
Refers to the extension for data files. The current currently expanding are listed below. CES CHN NED DAT FRN GRM ITA SPN TRK CZECH (Czech) CHINESE (Chinese) DUTCH (Dutch) ENGLISH (English) FRENCH (French) GERMAN (German) ITALIAN (Italian) SPANISH (Spanish) TURKISH (Turkish)
Tool Changer Information (information about the structure of the tool change) Machine Type: (Type of machine) ATC Type is: (Type of device changer tool) ATC tool (pocket count): (An instrument device changer (Number of nests)) Enter VMD 30 .... Manual / Avanti, Milltronics, or other
47
48
49
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Axis = The main screen - Options - Settings-Axis Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Label the axis address Correction: canceled The number of pulses per unit Instrument: Multiplier detector Length: Home position Diameter: Reference direction Plane: Velocity in the direction of the source Clearance: Velocity in the direction from the starting position Interpolation: linear (feed) The speed in the direction of the marker pulse Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Label the axis of the address: Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit
Press the PgUp (page up), PgDn (page down) and the arrows to scroll through the table at the top of the screen. At the bottom of the screen shows how to change the data associated with the position of the cursor at the top of the screen. To edit the values in these tables the cursor is moved using the arrow keys on the desired option from the top of the screen. When you press the 50
Sets the number of embedded multipliers pulses coming from the sensor. 0 - 1 time, 1 - 2 times and 2 - 4 times
The size limit for the zero position of the machine or source of
Determines the direction of rotation of the engine at team set the starting position Clockwise = 00.0000 anticlockwise = 01.0000 Sets the feed rate at which the axis of seeking limit switch starting position
51
Sets the speed at which the axis of seeking marker pulse sensor
These numbers determine the order of axes in the return starting position: First number1, then number 2, etc. Axis with the same number back to its original position together. 0 axis is not returning to its original position. The distance from the zero position of the machine, which there is a positive pre-programmed limit
The distance from the zero position of the machine, which there is a negative programmed limit
52
Acceleration / deceleration - a number that determines value at which the axis speed increases or decreases with respect to motions filing. Than lower the number, the longer the acceleration / deceleration Acceleration and deceleration in the NC are linear. Units are expressed as inches / sec .
Rapid Acc / Dec Faster acceleration / deceleration - a number that (Acceleration / deceleration in specifies the amount at which the axis speed accelerated movement) increases or decreases relative to X 20.0000 accelerated movement. The smaller the number, the Y 20.0000 longer acceleration / deceleration time. Dispersal and Z 20.0000 inhibition in the NC are linear. Units are expressed as inches / sec . Feed S-Curve Acc The units are identical (linear) acceleration / (Cent 7 and up) inhibition. They are used when s-curves (S-curve acceleration and deceleration activated by movement submission. feeding (Cent 7 and above)) Rapid S-Curve Acc The units are identical (linear) acceleration / (Cent 7 and up) inhibition. They are used when s-curves (S-curve acceleration and deceleration activated with accelerated movement. the accelerated movement of (Cent 7 and above)) Slow Jog Velocity (Jog feed on slow speed) X 50.0000 Y 50.0000 Z 50.0000 The rate in inches / min or mm / min.
53
Determines whether the Jog to the feed movement or the movement of the tool table. "1" changes direction.
After any rapid movement of the machine will wait until the axis will not be in a given position before starting the next block
Sets the distance in inches or mm, which axis will take place after a given position in one direction before the change direction so that the machine will always be positioned on one direction. Active only in G00.
P1
P2
The distance in one direction G60 Unidirectional (Unidirectional G60) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 Backlash (Gap) X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000 The same as the G00, only active in block G60
Sets the distance in inches or mm. The control unit will carry out the correction backlash in the reverse axis. Active in all modes.
54
English Trailing (Least significant bit, English) axis X 04.0000 Y 04.0000 Z 04.0000 Metric Leading (The senior ranks Metric) X 03.0000 Y 03.0000 Z 03.0000 Metric Trailing (Least significant bit, Metric) X 03.0000 Y 03.0000 Z 03.0000
Sets the number of digits to the right of the decimal point for the inch system, only for the specified
Same as the senior ranks in the British system, except for the fact that the metric system
Same as the Junior ranks in the British system, except for the fact that the metric system
55
Tool Changer Spacing (arm style) It is used to avoid placing large (Intervals changer instruments close to each other in the changing devices tool) with a rotary hand tool (With the swing arm) Gain Proportional (KP) (Proportional gain) mismatch. X + 08.0000 Y + 08.0000 Z + 08.0000 Gain Velocity (KV) (Growth rate) X + 250.0000 Y + 250.0000 velocity Z + 250.0000 KP in terms of stages of DAC errors
KV in terms of steps per unit of speed DACs. These units involve a 16-bit DAC (1 bit sign, 15 bits of amplitude), while the four lower bits do not carry a special significance. The units of in this case are the units / pulse, with a single pulse is 3/4096-nyh seconds. Higher values reduce the mismatch error. Valid values range from 50 to 327.
56
F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc (Main screen - Options - Settings - Other) Use the F5 (Misc) (Other) displays a variety of settings related to the spindle, and M-codes. Pressing the F5 (Misc) the following screen appears.
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Misc = Main screen - Options - Settings-Other Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Basic information about the machine Correction: canceled Type of machine Instrument: Version of the machine Length: Version of a mechanical system Diameter: Revision of the electrical system Plane: The serial number of the machine Clearance: Increasing the spindle from the front ... no Interpolation: linear (feed) Checking the acceleration signal (M3/M4) ... no Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Checking the zero speed (M5) ... no Units: absolute / English system The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 1 Cycle: canceled The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 2 Pause: (sec = seconds) The number of pulses / rev encoder handwheel Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Range of spindle speed 1 Coolant: Disabled Range of spindle speed 2 Number details: Range of spindle speed 3 Range of spindle speed 4 Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit
57
Up to Speed Axis (The axis of acceleration) Up to Speed Input (Signal input acceleration) Check Zero Speed (M5) (Check zero speed) Spindle Encoder PPU1 (The number of pulses / rev spindle sensor 1)
Spindle encoder PPU2 Number pulses / rev Spindle used for the (The number of pulses / rev option, rigid tapping and spindle sensor 2) display speed on the transfer of two Handwheel Encoder PPU (The number of pulses / rev flywheel sensor) The number of pulses / rev flywheel must be 400 for these systems
58
Max. spindle speed for the transfer 2 . . Max. spindle speed for the transfer 8
Speed range, which is set Spindle: 1 to 8. It is assumed in the range of Based on the programmed speed, an appropriate voltage. Captures the overall frequency of rotation of the spindle. It is used to limit the number of revolutions per minute in high gear, while leaving a large range of velocities in the lower gears.
Spindle Ramp Time 1 (sec) Stagnation point with tapping (Acceleration Time 1 spindle adjusted based on the speed (S)) wpindelya, pitch and spindle acceleration time not to exceed a preset depth. It dates back to the inhibition of spindle, expressed in seconds, before reaching 0 / min from full speed to transfer a. 2 Spindle Ramp Time (sec) Stagnation point with tapping (Acceleration spindle 2 adjusted based on the speed (S)) wpindelya, pitch and spindle acceleration time not to exceed a preset depth. It dates back to the inhibition of spindle, expressed in seconds, before reaching 0 / min from full speed to the transmission 2. 2 Gear Yaskawa M5 Spindle Motor (2-stage motor Spindle Yaskawa M5) Electronic Spindle Gear (Electronic transfer of spindle) Spindle Gear Box (Transmission of spindle) Yes (yes) for the new drive spindle M5 with 2 step-motor spindle. Spindle is not need to stop to switch. Yes (yes) will activate the electronic switch gear spindle. Yes (yes) to RW30 with a manual transmission spindle.
59
Quill Scale Encoder (The sensor bar sleeve) Quill Scale PPU Back Gear Reverse (The number of pulses / inch line of Quill, change of gear busting) Keyboard Code (Code keyboard) Yaskawa Drives (Drives Yaskawa)
60
Door Open Switch (Switch open doors) European Code (European code) Auger Aux (Cent 7 and up) Setup Aux (Cent 7 and up) (Additional button for screw (Cent 7 and above)) (Additional button for settings (Cent 7 and above) ) Door Open Axis Door Open Input (The axis of the door opening) (Log in opening the door)
Door Open Override Axis See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the Door Open Override Input end of this section. (The axis of the abolition of the door opening) (Log cancel opening the door) Check Tool Door Open (Checking tool when the door is open) Check Chiller Fault (Check the fault cooling devices) Chiller Fault Axis (Axis Fault cooling devices) If Yes (yes), The input Z 10 is checked prior to issuance Team hand tool change device. If input is not detected within 15 seconds, an error message timeout. If Yes (yes) and there is excess heat, a message about malfunction cooling. Specifies the axis for fault indication cooling devices.
61
See notes for European Codes (p. 68) In the end of this section. The delay time to permit movement of the axes After rebooting the machine. If Yes (yes) map position of the axis will be updated even when the emergency stop.
Probe Axis and Probe Specifies the axis and the number of inputs for use with Input commands for the sensor 1 and sensor 2. (The axis of the sensor and sensor input) Cranking Minutes / Rev How many minutes of normal performance (The number of minutes / v at startup) program corresponds to one turn the flywheel. Increasing the time of submission (in inches / min), this factor will lead to the filing, in inches / turn the flywheel. This value must be approximately .0010 to our existing systems. Cranking Factor (Ratio at start) The coefficient for each click of the handwheel approximately 100 in our current system. The coefficient of the start / min number / proportion of the startup maximum flow rate when manually started.
62
Programmed path
If the time to perform an action is less than this value, the control device will slow the feed rate to prevent giving plenty of movement from a lack of data.
End-of-Cycle Axis and With these two parameters determined what End-of-Cycle Outputs output will be used for a light signal (The axis of the end of the cycle and the end of the cycle. output end of the cycle) The light signal the end of the cycle does not require programming. The lamp will light up every time there is no traffic during the execution of the program and at the end of the program. This
63
Indicates number of axes of movement, which the device control can preview what allows the device to prepare for the management of acute corners or other elements, which otherwise may be rounded with increasing flow rate.
Note: The advanced view is activated only in DNC-fast. Valid values range from 10 to 255. Max graph file size (Maximum size graphic file) Minimum Parts Space (Minimum distance Limits the number of graphics on the screen. 30.000 for standard systems If the distance between the parts is less than the parameter in HF, the system will jump to the page
64
G18 is Plane XZ (X - major axis), or the plane ZX (Z (G18-it) the main axis) G93 is 1 /min or 1/sec rate for the inverse supply (G93-it) Special Flags Normally set to 0 (Special pins) Through a bit (# 1) there is a point on the graphical display in the planning of the tool path. Via bit 2 (# 2) turns off the trigonometric help. Through bit 3 (# 4) is turned off correction in the cutting tool. Through bits 5 (# 16) features a disk cutter in the XY plane with the same diameter as that of the active tool. Through the six-bit (# 32) features a 3-dimensional tool for graphical display. Ignore Rapids in Autoscale (Ignore accelerated movement of with automatic scale) If you choose to Yes (yes)Accelerated movement will ignored in the automatic scaling graphics.
Remove Length If you choose to Yes (yes), With graphical representation of all from Graphics the length of the instrument will be considered equal to 0. (Remove the length of the charts) Screen Blank Time (min) (Time to turn off screen (min)) Flat Screen Blank (Off the plane screen) Use FLZ instead of G54 (Use FLZ instead of the G54) Time in minutes before switching off the screen if no key not pressed. Yes (yes) for CRT screens. Some flat screens takes too long to update, if parameter is set to Yes (yes). Used to set the correct operating mode jog feed or manual mode. Yes (yes) means use of FLZ (correction G92). No (no) means the use of offsets G54.
65
Tool Setting Use If set to No (no), The position given by Work Offsets operator applies to the original. If set to Yes (The use of workers (Yes)Given the position relates to the work of correction (this is corrections when setting useful when setting up the tool off the table and tool) application of labor adjustment to the top of the Z tool). Extract Input Programs (Extract program entry) Restrictive Edit Key (Restricted keys editing) If set to Yes (yes), The control unit will remove programs based on 0 # # # in the file, downloaded from floppy disk drive, or obtained in the RS-232. Program-doubles overwritten, with no hint is displayed to the operator. If this parameter is set to Yes (yes), and the key editing is enabled, then: From the main menu you can select F2 (Jog) (Jog feed), F3 (HDW) (flywheel) or F4 (Run) (Performing). In the Jog to select only the F1 (Slow) (slow) or F2 (Fast) (Fast). In the HDW can select only the axis X, Y, Z, A or B. In Run mode you can only select F1 (Start) (Start) - F2 (Old) (existing program) or F7 (Menu) (Menu). F3 (Block) (Block), F4 (OStop) (optional stop) and F5 (BSkip) (Pass Block) only displayed. They can not be changed.
P899 As for the special options consult factory. Resolve DNC programs (Resolution DNC programs) If you choose to Yes (yes), Goto program can be used in DNC (DNC), Run (Execute) or DNC Verf (Check DNC).
Full Dos File Names If you choose to Yes (yes)Can be used by the file names (Full names of the files DOS up to 11 characters [FILENAME.EXT]. At DOS) Pressing "D" in any menu option displays Full Dos File Names (Full file names DOS). Disable 417 Errors If you choose to Yes (yes), The parameters can be changed during the
66
CAD Parameters (Parameters CAD) CAD Type is, DXF, CDL Type of CAD file to import dialog (Type of CAD, DXF, CDL) programming. CAD Epsilon (Epsilon CAD) Tolerance for geometric intersection of imported Files CAD.
Post M codes Table (Table future M-code) Post M code # 0 Post M code # 1 Post M code # 2 Post M code # 3 Post M code # 4 Post M code # 5 Post M code # 6 Post M code # 7 Post M code # 8 Post M code # 9 Report File (Report file) Command Name (Team name) Post M code = following M-code
These are M-codes will be performed after all other operations within the block.
Filenames DOS, in which the text is written DPRINT using POPEN P0 Any line in this parameter will appear in the key F10 (Util) (Utilities). Pressing the F10 will execute the file DOS, associated with the command name. See more details about this feature on page 140.
67
Spindle Power Value (AMPS) Calculated on the basis of the initial capacity and (Power the scale of the spindle spindle (amp)) Spindle Power Limit (AMPS) (Limit of spindle power (Amp)) Not applicable
European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions (descriptions of the parameters and the functioning of European codes) Door Open Switch (Switch open doors) European Code (European code) Door-Open axis (The axis of the door opening) Door-Open-Input (Entrance door opening) Door-Open-Override Axis (The axis of the abolition of opening the door) Door-Open-Override Input (Entrance cancel opening the door) Max Feed with Door Open (Maximum speed filing with the door open) Activate the switch is open the door
Activate the door opening button Axis , which gets the input-switch door Log , which gets the input-switch door Axis , which enters the cancel button opening the door Input , which enters the cancel button opening the door The maximum speed of the machine when the door is open, If you click cancel opening the door
68
Software related to European codes for opening the safety door switch. Below is a description of the software relative to the button Set Up (Configure), and the parameters of the software. Only if the switch is activated by opening the door When the door is opened, turns off the spindle, and stop feeding the machine. When the door is opened, the spindle will not start. When the door is open, you can not make manual data entry, filing shaking, the machine will not operate in a mode of execution, however, you can do the job manually using the handwheel. The machine will perform the functions associated with I / O, except the inclusion of the spindle (ie, manipulation of the rotary arm, connecting rod, etc.). If the machine performs the tapping, and the door opened, he finishes the operation, will make stops feeding and stop the spindle. If the door is opened during operation of the machine: A Spindle off. 2 Stop the movement along the axis. 3 Stop feeding the lamp lights up. 4 The spindle will not start again. To continue: A Close the door (lights Cycle Start (Start of cycle)). 2 Click on the button CW (Clockwise) on the front panel (spindle run again). 3 Click on the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle) on the front panel (Cycle Start stop flashing and the indicator goes off Feedhold (Stop feeding)). If the machine does not work, and the spindle does not work, opening the door will have no impact on the machine. However, the indicator lights Feedhold (Stop feeding). If the switch is activated by opening the door and the European Code When the door is open, what happens when you press the button door open (Opening door), the spindle is turned off, and stop feeding the machine going. When the door is opened, the spindle will not start. When the door is open, you can not make manual data entry, filing shaking, the machine will not operate in a mode of execution of the program, it will not run in the flywheel. If the machine performs the tapping, and the door opened, he finishes the operation, and then make stops feeding and stop the spindle. If the door is opened, the machine will allow the device to change the tool indexed by only one position while using the utility tool change or customize the tool. If the door is opened and the button is held Setup (Settings), the machine with jog feed enters the parameter Max Feed with Door Open (ipm) (max. flow rate with the door open (inches / min)). If the door is opened and the button is held Setup (Settings), the machine comes with the flywheel up to speed on the switch 50% correction of the feed rate that is 0.1 mm / click
69
70
71
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr = Main screen-Options-Settings-Correction-Correction flywheel Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction settings flywheel Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; FdOvr = feed rate correction; HwOvr = correction of the flywheel; SpOvr = correction of the spindle; Back = back
72
Exit = Exit F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings Correction - Correction of the spindle) Use the F6 (SpOvr) 16 switch settings are displayed correct spindle. These settings are the percentages by which the correction will be made in each spindle command line switch position. Correction parameters are changed the spindle in the same manner as the parameters of feedrate. Screen adjustment spindle is shown below.
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr = Main screen - Options - Settings-correction-correction of spindle Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
73
Edit = edit; FdOvr = feed rate correction; HwOvr = correction of the flywheel; SpOvr = correction of the spindle; Back = back
Exit = Exit F7 (BSC) Main-Parms-Setup-BSC (Home Screen - Options - Settings - Correction to the ball-screw pair)
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-BSC = Main screen - Options - Settings-correction on the ball-screw pair Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
74
New = new; On = ON.; Off = off.; Load = load; Gap = gap; Edit = edit; Done = done
Help to create a table of correction on the ball-screw pair Enter X, Y, Z (A, B, C) to select the axis. With the help of F1 (New) (New) creates a new, blank table is ball-screw pair. With the F2 (On) (On) the correction is included in the ball-screw pair for a given axis. With the F3 (Off) (Off) turns off correction in the ball-screw pair for a given axis. With F4 (Load) (download) table of ball screw pair is loaded into the axle. With F5 (Gap) (gap) varies in the range of file ball screw pair, created by F1 (New) (New). With F6 (Edit) (Edit) to edit the transition table ball screw pair. With F7 (4 <> 6) is selected 4 or 6 decimal places in your ball-screw pair, generated by F1 (New) (New). ESC (Done) (Done). F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-DOS (Main screen - Options - Preferences - Tip DOS) Pressing the F9 (DOS) is out of the NC program and returns to the tip DOS.
75
G28 Reference Point 1 G30 Reference Point 2 G30 Reference Point 3 G30 Reference Point 4
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Coord = Main screen - Options - Contact Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
76
Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit
It should be noted that working with the coordinates of the G54 to G59 are subsets. To view / edit, for example, labor adjustment G573 move the cursor to work four-coordinate (G57), then switch (F3) for as long as the subset will not be reading 3. The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)
Mach = Mach number; Esc = exit The functioning of the working coordinate systems G92 and G52 described in section 4, page 374 (G92), and p 335 (G52). These parameters are the positions relative to the zero point of the machine and become a new zero point of their use. Use the F4 (Mach) in the edit mode is entered the current state of the machine as the zero point of the working coordinates for X, Y, and Z. Use the F5 (M-XY) coordinates are introduced only to the axes X and Y. Use the F6 (MZ) is introduced only for the coordinate axis Z.
77
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Tool = Main screen - Options - Tools Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool = Tool Correction: canceled Lengths = length Instrument: Diameters = diameter Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit
The cursor defaults to the number sent to the active tool. The process of editing on this screen is the same as on all other screens Parms (parameters). When selecting F3 displays a table of tool length (H) and Table tool radius (D). The value entered in the string length, T04, introduced also in H04. The value entered in the string radius, T04, also introduced in the D04. This entry screen is there, mostly for convenience, it is useful if the correction of H and D are associated with the corresponding T-numbers. Note: In the control device can be modified with respect to the use of the radii of the tool instead of the diameters. When editing tool offset current value of the right side of the edited 78
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-D Off = The main screen - Options - Correction to the diameter of the Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool Diameters = diameter of tool Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit
79
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-H Off = The main screen - Settings - Adjust the length of the Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool Diameters = tool length Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit
The cursor defaults to the number sent to the active tool. F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save (Home Screen - Options - Save) Use the F6 (Save) saves all the files in RAM (memory) on a floppy disk. You will be informed that the duplicate files to a floppy disk will be overwritten. Then you will be prompted to confirm this by pressing the F1 (Ok).
80
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Prog = Main screen - Options - Program Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance The previous position of P200 Correction: canceled R208 Current Situation Instrument: Previous R216 machine Length: R224 Current Machine Diameter: R232 Working Correction Plane: P240 Correction to the tool Clearance: R248 radius of the arc Interpolation: linear (feed) R249 The value of i arc Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Previous position Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit
This parameter set gives access to all machine programmer's internal parameters used by the CNC program. Typically, these parameters are used only for display purposes as an aid in debugging the program. However, you can read and modify these parameters in a parametric program. This should be done with great caution, because these parameters are used directly to NC for the next move or function. These parameters are displayed and edited in the
81
P248 P249 P250 P251 P252 P253 From P254 to P258 P260 P261
82
83
84
F9 (CTRL) Main-Parms-CTRL (Main screen - Options - CTRL) This parameter set is a superset of F8 (Prog) (Program). This group deals primarily with the parameters used for the automatic creation of standard programs and group loops. These parameters can be checked and changed in the same manner as all other parameters are the control device. Below is a list and description of these parameters. Load Text Cycles (Download text cycles) Offset Round Tapered Walls (Correction of curved and tapered walls) Spindle Range (Range of rotation spindle) Chip Remove On (Min) (Removal of chips inc. (Min)) Wash Down On (Sec) Wash Down Off (Sec) (Washing incl. (S)) (Washing off. (S)) Sort Directories by Name (Sort directories by name) Drive Key on Menus (Key disk in the menu) Auto Rotary Brake (Automatic rotary brake) Yes (yes) cycles to load the engraving text. If set to No (no)And the text runs the team, you will be an error 578 "Undefined text cycle" (Uncertain text cycle). See Description M95 and M96 (p 393 and 396, Section 5)
If the machine is equipped with a screw removal system chips, it will be the time during which auger will run after the M38 or pressing a button Auger (Screw) on the front panel. During operation, the screw with the data parameters of time on and off wash-around If you select yes (yes), the menus are sorted alphabetical order by the 1st line of code. Note: this option is invoked by pressing the "N" from any menu. If you select yes (yes) key gives aid the operator to select the drive for the menu. It allows the operator to select a new directory for the menu. If you choose to Yes (yes) is automatic control of rotational axis on the brake A and B. This brake is turned off before the circular movement, and turned back on after the move. If you select No (no), to
85
Ignore Tool too Large Errors If you choose to Yes (yes) control device will be (Ignore the error, ignore the error 569 and cut the corner when tool compensated arc too small. too large) Pre Check Software Limits Never (ever), Run Only (only in Run), or (Pre-screening Always (always). Never: the control unit programmed never checks the programmed limits. limits) Early versions of the software to work that way. Errorprogrammed limits is issued, if the axis is moved outside. Run Only: checks are not performed in the test mode. During the execution of the program will be tested, do not move if any of the axes of the outside, prior to displacement. In the graphical representation of the course will be shown, but the machine will not implement it. This can prevent the collision, when the movements are fast moving beyond. In earlier versions of the accelerated movement was carried to the limits, and it was impossible to stop before the limit switch and / or a hard stop. Always: the control unit will monitor does not go there any axis beyond in the performance of the program or during the scan. The graphical display will show the progress, but the machine will not implement it. It may be useful to test the program before you implement it. Tool Load Flag (Check downloads tool) Tool Load Monitor (Sensor load tool) Off (Off) E-Stop Limit Exceeded (Limit exceeded) or Limit not Exceeded (limit is not exceeded) Currently there are six options: There will be no control of the tool / spindle. If the limit is exceeded, the machine switches to
86
The sample is made only in the movements of supply (G1, G2 and G3). Sampling is not performed when the accelerated movements (G0). Sampling is carried out only during acceleration drive spindle when the program is executed and the spindle is turned on. Necessary to stabilize the load of the spindle after any change in the number of its revolutions per minute. This requires that the program was expecting about 5 seconds after the dissolution or any change in the correction to the frequency of rotation of the spindle. Time is hard-coded (no option). Time is based on the configuration of two-speed spindle at 8000 rev / min. Various actuators, spindles and / or drive parameters can affect the time delay.
87
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Tool = Main screen - Options - Tools Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Tool = Tool Correction: canceled Lengths = length Instrument: Diameters = diameter Length: Limit = limit Diameter: High = higher value of Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Exit = exit
It controls only the tools 1 to 25, they will have these options. Column load spindle will also have a number associated with it. Watch Spindle up to Speed (Tracking signal If set to YES (Yes), the device Management will monitor the dispersal of the signal.
88
Serial Port Data (serial data) Note: Com-port, baud rate baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits are the parameters for communication. See more details on page 126, Section 4 of F4 (RS232). Primary Serial Port (Primary serial port) COM1 Baud Rate (COM1, baud rate data baud rate) COM1 Parity, Data and Stop Bits (COM1, parity, Information and stop bits) COM2 Baud Rate (COM2, transfer rate data baud rate) COM2 Parity, Data and Stop Bits (COM2, parity, Information and stop bits) NONE, COM1 or COM2
N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, E/7/2, E/8/1, E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2
N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, E/7/2, E/8/1, E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2
89
Tape Start Character Value ASCII, is used to send in (A symbol of starting tape) the opening of the port comTape Stop Character (The symbol of the stop band) RS232 Buffer Size (Buffer size RS232) LF in change to CR (Line in changes to the return carriage) End of Block Send CR / LF (Send the return carriage / linefeed at the end of block) RS232 EOF Character (Mark the end of File RS232) Value ASCII, is used to send in closing of the port com-
One for users who are long connect the RS-232, and 255 to improve the RS-232 to DNC Yes (yes) means a change of carriage returns, received on the RS-232, a transfer line
Yes (yes) means sending a carriage return / transfer lines at the end of blocks that are sent to the RS-232
The value of ASCII character sent by the end of File sent to the RS-232
90
91
P151 P152 P153 P154 P155 P156 P157 P158 P159 From P160 to P171 From P172 to P179
92
F10 (User) Main-Parms-User (main screen - Options - User) This set of 100 parameter is reserved for the programmer to handle parts for use in the writing of parametric programming. These parameters are not defined, you can edit, display or download from this screen. Formats, editing and display identical parameters described in this section. See information about programming options in Section 5.
RunTime = Period Main-Parms-User = main screen - Options mPolzovatel Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
93
F8 (Prog) Main-Prog (main screen - the Program) Centurion at the control device has two modes of creation / editing of program files: text and dialogue. Pressing the F8 (Prog) (Program) is activated by a functional keyboard, and you can select the type of programming. It also allows you to transfer programs from floppy disks, and on him.
RunTime = Period Main-Prog = Main screen - Program Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
94
Test and interactive programs are stored in the control unit in different file formats and have different prefixes for their differences. Text of the program have to prefix the letter "O" and stored in the machining of parts in ASCII. Dialog programs are stored in the machining of parts in two formats: ASCII, with the prefix "O"; and in the dialog - the prefix "P". Only programs with the prefix "O" can be carried out or verified. F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text (main screen - Program - Text mode) If you switch to text mode programming in the top right of the cell containing the number of active programs that will be displayed last edited the test program.
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text = Main Screen-Program-Text Mode Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
95
F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit) Use the F1 (Edit) (Edit), select the program shown in the upper right corner, as an active editable text program. Terms of text editing Program Editing: Lyrics: The program allows you to input and change information, then save it to a file for retrieval and / or further changes in the future. Refers to the edited sequence of characters and / or rows. Manipulation of the individual characters are produced by the widespread American standard code exchange (ASCII). The small square on the screen, marking where the text changes were made.
Cursor:
Writing and editing text Text is entered in the same way as he was introduced to using a typewriter, and most of the keys on the keyboard correspond to the standard layout (such as pressing Enter to complete block). However, one should pay attention to many important differences. The cursor always points to that which will be introduced a new text, you can move the cursor in several ways. You can copy and move through the test block commands. You can place a line of text using the F8 (Find) (Find) and additionally to replace it with another string using the F7 (Chang) (Edit). And, in most cases, you can even undo some recent changes with the help recovery teams line F2 (Rest) or F1 (UnDo) (Cancel). These commands and others are summarized in the following sections.
96
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Edit = Home screen, program-text-editing mode Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Block = block; Cursr = cursor; Words = words; Misc = other; Ins = insert; Delete = delete; Exit = output; Verf = check
97
F1 (Begin)
Marks the beginning of the block. The very visible marker on the screen, and the block (Top) becomes visible only when the marker is the end of the block. F2 (End) Marks the end of the block. As early marker block, marker of the end (End) block invisible, and the block will not appear until they install both markers. F3 (Word) Marks a word as a unit, combining the functions of the commands start (Word)block and end block. When the cursor within a word, that word will be marked. If it is not within a word, the word will be marked on the right of the cursor. If the right of the cursor is not the word, the word will be marked on his left. F5 (Hide) (Hide) F6 (Del) (Delete) Turns off the mark, and includes a visual block. Deletes the marked and displayed block. While using the F1 (UnDo) (Cancel), you can usually recover accidentally deleted part of the block there is no command to restore the block completely, so this command should be used with caution.
F7 (Copy) Creates a copy of the marked and displayed block in the current (Copy) the cursor position. Initiallyth block remains unchanged, and the markers are placed around a new copy of the block.
98
F1 (BBlok) F2 (EBlok) F3 (Tab) F5 (TOF) F6 (EOF) F7 (PgUp) F8 (PgDn) F9 (Left) F10 (Right)
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the marker block. Moves the cursor to the position of the bullet end of the block. Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word. Moves the cursor to the first character of the program. Moves the cursor to the last line of code. Moves the cursor up 15 lines. Moves the cursor down 15 lines. Moves the cursor to the top of the line. Moves the cursor to the end of the line.
F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing Word) Pressing the function key F3 (Words) (Word), open the reserved words that can be used for programming the control unit.
Pressing the key word will be printed on the screen. See the information on the parametric programming in Section 6. Note: Pressing the F6 (RETRN) will be printed RETURN (Return).
99
F1 (UnDo) F2 (Rest)
Restores the entire line, deleted using the delete command to delete a row or block. It does not restore the individual characters or words. Cancels any changes made to the line of text until you came out of that line. The line is restored to its previous contents, regardless of the changes. Enables the use of a flywheel to move into position. You can insert the position of the axis of the program by pressing Enter.
F3 (HDW)
F1 - F4 (X / Y / Z / A) Select the axis position to insert F6 (LnDel) F7 (Chang) Deletes the line where the cursor is positioned and moves all rows below it up one line. The cursor moves to column 1 of the next line. This operation works the same way as the team Find (Find), except that it is possible to replace the found string any string of up to 67 characters. After entering the search string will be prompted to enter a string to replace. The latter was introduced to replace the string, if any, will be displayed, it can take, edit, or enter a new line. In the end, given a hint about the options. The first displays the options that were used last. You can enter a new option (abolishing the old), edit the current options, or select them by pressing the Enter (Enter). Available options are the same as for the command Find (Find). Allows you to search for a string of up to 67 characters. When you enter this command, you will be prompted for the search string. Displays the last search string, if any. You can select the row again by pressing the Enter (Enter) or edit it, or enter a new search string. Once the search string is entered, you must specify search options. This displays the options used for the last time, if available. You can enter a new option (abolishing the old), edit the current options, or select them again by pressing the Enter. Following options are available.
F8 (Find)
100
L U W
If the text is an object that matches the search string, the cursor is placed directly behind him. Note: For replacement surgery an option available. N: No option "N", before changing each row that prompt "Replace Y / N / A / Q" (Replace Y / N / A / Q) allows the operator to Y: Yes (yes) - to change it N: No (no) - do not change it A: REPLACE ALL unprompted (Used with the global option "G") Q: QUIT - stop (using the global option "G") ESC: does the same thing and quit (stop) With the option "N" is not given a hint to change the line or lines. F9 (FNext) Repeats the last search operation. If the last command was a search operation Find (Search) will be repeated this same search string and options, for the operation Find-and-Replace (find and replace) the replacement string will also be used again.
101
ESC (Exit) Pressing the ESC (Exit) exit from (Exit) editing program, active editable program is checked for changes. When they were done, a message appears indicating whether to accept and save your changes. When you click on the "Y" changes are accepted, and the program file is changed. When you click on the "N" changes are discarded, and the file remains unchanged. Pressing the ESC will return to edit mode. HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit Check) When editing a text file, you can check the edited program. Key HELP (Verf) is not active if the currently running program or verified. Pressing the HELP (Verf) program will be tested in trial mode, with zero radius of the tool, as if the program was tested with the option F5 (Part) (Detail). Movement of supply are shown in yellow. Rapid movements are not shown. After testing the program will be made auto-scaling. You'll look at the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). Then you can rotate, zoom, zoom, and etc. Pressing the ESC will return in a text editor.
102
103
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Menu = Home screen, program-text-mode menu Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Verf = check; Enter = input; Togle = shift; PhUp = page up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Drive = CD
Edit window appears, showing the first 16 programs. To select one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow keys and scroll keys to move the cursor to the desired program and press the key F5 (Enter) or Enter - on the keyboard. The function menu can be accessed from other screens, but it will work the same way. If the menu from the screen due to Verify (Test), the selected program becomes active editing program. Use the F1 (Verf) (Test) graphically checked the item on which the cursor is positioned. Shows the scheme would apply to an instrument with a diameter of 0. When you press the F6 (Togle) (Switching) will show the file size, date and time 104
Pressing the "D" menu switches to the full names of DOS and vice versa. Pressing the "N" include sorting by name or description of the file. Regardless of which mode you select (Edit (Editing), New (New), Old (Old), Any (Any) or Menu (Menu)) is used when there is an editing window, the number of editable text programs will be shown in the active window. F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode) In this section we will focus on the choice of interactive programs. When you enter the interactive programming mode active window in the upper right corner will change to show the latest edited interactive program.
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
105
There are five options to choose from an interactive program for editing. F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit (main screen - Program - Interactive mode-Edit) By pressing F1 (Edit) (Edit) selected program and an active dialog to log into interactive programming. When programming or editing in interactive system there are three types of function keys. That the following keys: -The configuration of the function keys 1: Editing keys
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
106
These function keys are available when there was made Logon Edit menu. Program can be divided into steps, edit the event and insert or delete an event. Definitions of Key editing F1 (Edit): By pressing F1 (Edit) (Edit) cursor (Edit) installed in the first field of the current event. Will save the key / I, and the event can be edited. F2 (View): Allows you to view the whole program and position in the (View) any of the events in the program. A window similar to the next.
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
107
F7 ( ), F8 ( ), F9 (PgUp) and F10 (PgDn) can be used to navigate to the desired event. Then press the ESC or Enter, to reflect this event. F1 (Begin): F2 (End): F3: F4 F5 Note: F3 (Event) F4 (T # #) F6 (Ins) Marks the beginning of the block Marks the end of the block Deletes the block of events Copies a block of events at the cursor position Moves a block of events at the cursor position You can not move, delete or copy the installation screen of the program or end the program of events. Allows you to enter an event for your search. If the number of events are not detected, the screen appears the end of the program. Permits entry of the tool to search for numbers. If the number is not found a tool to display the event does not change. INS is used to insert events into the program. A new (-s), event (s) is inserted before the event, which is currently displayed. Insert lasts as long as you press the function key F10 (Exit) (Exit). Removes a phenomenon that appears at the moment. Displays the previous event in the program file. Displays the following phenomenon in the program file.
108
Key HELP (Verf) is not active if the currently running program or verified. Pressing the HELP (Verf) program will be tested in trial mode, with zero radius of the tool, as if the program was tested with the option F5 (Part) (Detail). Movement of supply are shown in yellow. Rapid movements are not shown. After testing the program will be made auto-scaling. You'll look at the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). You can then perform the rotation, zoom, zoom and so on Pressing the ESC will return to the dialog editor. Notes on key HELP (Verf) (HELP (check)) Note 1:When the program is verified to be ignored M6, M0, M1, operators, and so I Note 2. If you need a lot of time to test the software, you can press the ESC key during its inspection. Carried out through its automatic scaling that has been tested, and the transition to the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). The program will continue until the end of the test or re-pressing the ESC. Note 3. Operators While without wend and operators wend without while will not cause error messages. ESC (Exit) Exit the dialog system and the automatic generation of executable program text with the prefix O. The keys to save / I
109
These function keys are available when input is expected. At this time, the screen will appear, containing any number of fields, and the cursor will be in one of the fields. There are two types of fields that can be displayed on-screen input: the data field and the field shift. The data fields - a field in which data is entered using the keyboard. Red fields require input. Switching fields - is a field with a limited number of possible incoming values and the values that can only be changed by pressing the F3 (Togl) (Switch). Definitions of key conservation / I F1 (Store) Accepts inputs and adds them to the program file. If all the required data has not been entered, the key F1 (Store) will not work, and the cursor moves to the field, requiring input. Each screen is saved is called an event. Clicking this button will display the following values of the switching field. It is absent in the data field. Used to delete entries from the data field. It is absent in the switch. Moves the cursor to the previous field. Moves the cursor to the next field. Moves the cursor to the left. It has no effect on the switch. Moves the cursor to the right. It has no effect on the switch. Cancel entry and return to the menu keys.
110
111
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Pos = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Position Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Event 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160 Correction: canceled Position Instrument: Length: The feed rate [accelerated] Diameter: Coordinates [Cartesian] Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Store = save; Togl = shift; Exit = output;
Note that, at all levels, except for level 1, there is a key ESC (Back) (Back). With the help of it returns to the previous menu level keys. Pressing the F10 (Exit) going out of the sub menus and editing keys appear at level 1.
112
Note:
F3 (Togl) (Switch) and F5 (Del) (Delete) can not be on the same screen.
See more details about the input dialog screens in SECTION 3 - display a dialog input. F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - Menu) The key F7 (Menu) (Menu) dialog displays a list of all programs currently loaded in the catalog of programs for processing details.
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Menu = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Menu Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
113
Press the F7 - F10 arrows to select a file located on the program you want to edit, but the key F5 (Enter) (Enter) is pressed to make a choice. Edit window appears, displaying the setup screen of the program. Regardless of which mode you select [F1 (Edit) (Edit, F2 (New) (New), F3 (Old) (Old), F4 (Any) (Any) or F7 (Menu) (Menu)] is used when editing window appears, the number of editable interactive programs will be shown in the active window. F6 (Togle) shows the time and date for each program. F9 (Verf) Main-Verf (Main screen - Check) Function F9 (Verf) (Test) is used to verify the machining program. In general, the inspection is performed in graphical mode, but it is not necessary. Time is really checking, and can be used to calculate the processing time. The tested program is active. To obtain information about the coordinates for comparison with the map, set the control unit in the block mode, and go through the stages of the program. The cursor in graphics mode will be about the details, and the mapping XYZ will read the coordinate values of each point.
114
RunTime = Period Main-Verf = Main screen, check Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Old = old; Block = block; OStop = extra stops; BSkip = pass block; Displ = map; Menu = menu; Dry = idle; Esc = exit
115
RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Start = Main screen, check Active = Active Current = current Next = Click on the following <Cycle Start> (Start of cycle) to start the program from the beginning Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: First = first; Block = block; Tool = Tool; Path = path; Part = item; Both = both; Abort = abort
Key F1 (First) (First) is automatically selected when you enter this screen from the screen Verf (check). So if you want to test an active program from the beginning, you need only press the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle). If you press F2 (Block) (Block), the device management request to enter a number or sequence of the desired block, and then press Enter. If the button is pressed Cycle Start (The first cycle), an active program will be checked from the selected block. If you press F3 (Tool) (tool), the control unit will ask about the number of the instrument. After entering the number of tools and squeezing Enter button is pressed Cycle Start (Start of cycle). Active program will check with the number you want the tool, and the following screen. Use the F4 (Path) (path) shows the trajectory of the tool on a graphic screen. Use the F5 (Part) (detail) shows the trajectory of moving parts on the graphics screen. Use the F6 (Both) (Both), and shows the tool path and the trajectory of the details on the graphics screen.
116
RunTime = Period Main-Verf = Main screen, check Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: left cut Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled SECTION 28 ..... Number details: Block = block; OStop = extra stops; BSkip = pass block; Displ = map; Dry = idle; Halt = Stop; Esc = exit
117
F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ (Main Screen - Check - Displays) By the key F6 (Display) (map) can be accessed from multiple screens. The screen below shows, as if access to the F6 (Displ) was carried out from the screen F9 (Verf) (Test). All display functions and screens are identical, regardless of the access point. Differ only in the cusps on the basis of the original access point. When you press the F6 (Disp) the following screen appears.
RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Displ = Main Screen-Display-Check Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
118
F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Distance) See page 24, Section 2. F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error (Home Screen - Check - Displays - Error) See page 24, Section 2. F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Graphic display) If you press F3 (Graph) (graphic display), the control unit switches to display text on a graphic display of the active part program. The following screen appears.
RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Displ-Graph = Main screen, check-display-graphic display Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter:
119
Graphs in the NC are fully three-dimensional and displayed in the graphics area as long as the control device is in graphics mode F3 (Graph). At the request of other maps in the graphics area of the window will appear with the requested data. At the end of the window with these features disappear, and the graphical display will be restored. The scale at the top of the screen is used to control the size of parts. If you change the scale on the lines dividing the screen will change accordingly. Division in the rulers expressed in units of the machine, but in the English system of measurement. The largest division is approximately one inch. Note: Charts are removed from the screen when you start or the beginning of the test program. Functions of graphics used in the test mode, the same as the functions used in run mode. A full explanation of these features, see page 24, Section 2, the graphics mode of the program. F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag (main screen - Check - Displays - Diagnostics) See page 30, Section 2. F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry (Main Screen - Check - Idle) F8 (Dry) (Idle), running in test mode, will drive the program as quickly as possible. For positions feedrate of 100% and above - the scan speed is gradually reduced to 0-90% correction. F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt (Main Screen - Checking - Stop) F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum (Main screen - Validity - Renewal) If the program was stopped F9 (Halt) (Stop), resume function is activated. Now the screen will display validation key F9 (Resum) (Renewal). The program can be resumed, until the key is active. If you choose to resume function, an active program will be resumed from the point of shutdown. Press the F3, F4, F5 and F8 the screen test mode is set to test the program. When these buttons are illuminated, the functions are active at any current tested the program or the program to be tested.
120
F10 (Util) Main-Util (Main Screen - Utilities) Buttons and options that are displayed when you press F10 (Util):
F1 (Probe) Main-Util-Probe (Home Screen - Utilities - Sensor) Note: For machines with the option of sampling. If digitization is part of the options and pressed F1 (Probe) (sensor), will be on display next screen.
RunTime = Period Main-Util-Probe = Utility main screen-Sensor Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
121
Note: F1 (Probe) (sensor) is used only for sampling XZ or YZ. F1 (Begin) If the selected file input and output mode will begin digitizing. If not, an error message 808 "Set up not selected" (Installation is not selected).
F3 (In) Displays a menu from which you select the file that contains information to guide sampling. F4 (Out) Specifies the output mode for the digitized data. Options are as follows. F1 - RS232 F2 - File F3 - Disk Primary Serial File number NC The name of the file on a floppy disk
122
RunTime = Period Main-Util-XyDig = Utility main screen-digitizing XY Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance SCREEN INSTALLATION Digitization Correction: canceled The input file: NOT SELECTED Instrument: Display Mode: NOT SELECTED Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Begin = start; In = input; Out = output; Close = close; Esc = exit
F1 (Begin)
If the selected file input and output mode will begin digitizing. If not, an error message 808 "Set up not selected" (Installation is not selected).
F3 (In) Displays a menu from which you select the file that contains information to guide sampling.
123
Note: More information about the digitization of a guide for digitization. F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files (Main Screen - Utilities - Files) In the utilities to work with files containing basic data manipulation function. They are:
Load = load; Save = save; Renam = rename; Copy = copy; Ram = memory; Erase = delete; Done = done
F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load (Main Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Download) The function F1 (Load) (Download) is used to download programs from the floppy disk into the program memory control unit. When this function is selected, the following screen appears.
RunTime = Period Main-Util-Files-Load = Utility main screen-Files, Download Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance
124
In the editing window will display a list of programs on a floppy disk. The cursor selection (> <) is located on the first program. F1 (Start) (Start) When you click on this button starts the transfer of selected programs floppy disk into the memory of the program. If the file already exists, the operator will be given a hint.
F2 (Set) Selects the file to which the cursor is positioned to boot from the floppy (Set) drive. It will be highlighted. F3 (Reset) Deselects the file to which the cursor is positioned. Cancels the selection (Reset) the selected file. F4 (All) (All) F5 (None) (Nothing) F6 (Togle) (Switching) F7 ( ) Selects all the programs on a floppy disk that you want to download. Selects all files. Deselect all selected programs. Deselects all the selected files. Shows the size and file date. Moves the cursor to select the top.
F8 ( ) Moves the cursor to select down. F9 (PgUp) F10 (PgDn) Moves the cursor to select up to 16 lines. Moves the cursor down to the choice of 16 lines.
The key means used to select the new disk, or to check the program (based on the parameter control unit) 125
F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save (Home Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Conservation) The function F2 (Save) is used to save programs from the program memory control device on a floppy disk. The function F2 (Save) works the same way as the function F1 (Load) (download), except that the transfer direction is changed. F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Rename) With the function F3 (Rename) changing the name of the program. If a new file name already exists, the operator will be shown the appropriate prompt. F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy (Home Screen - Utilities - Files - Copy) With the function F4 (Copy) makes a copy of the program under a different name. If a new file name already exists, the operator will be shown the appropriate prompt. F5 ( Ram) Main-Util-Files- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Files - RAM)
This function is used to download programs from floppy disk, Zip-drive or network drive to the RAM disk and then RAM in the DNC. Note: RAM disks of more available as an option. F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Erase) Function F9 (Erase) is used to erase the program from the program memory control unit. Available keys are the same as in option F2 (Save) (Save). F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232 (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232) In the utilities F4 (RS232) provides basic communication functions. These include the following:
126
After selecting the F1 (Text) (text) or F2 (Conv) (interactive), select the programs you want to send to the computer running in standalone mode, with the menu. In connection with these actions the following menu appears.
F1 (Begin) (Start) starts to transfer an active program, which is shown in the upper right corner. F7 (Menu) (Menu) to select the program to send the menu. Notes on sending Note 1:When sending parameters F7 (Menu) (Menu) is not an option. Note 2:Parameters of the RS-232 must be set to identical values in the control device and computer. Always check these settings. Note 3:Parameters of the RS-232 are located in the parameters of the control unit (Main-ParmsCtrl) (Home Screen - Options - Ctrl). Default settings: Primary Port Baud Rate Parity Data bits Stop bits COM1 from 1200 to 9600 even 7 2
F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Get) Option F6 (Recev) (Get) is used for programs or settings from a computer running in standalone mode, in memory of the program control unit. When you press the F6 (Recev) will see a new toolbar buttons (shown below). Next, enter a new number in the message window of the program. After the introduction of the real numbers of the program editing screen will appear and will show the program after it is received. Preparation continues for as long as you press ESC (Done) (Done).
127
If set to extract the files, multiple files can be sent from a computer running in standalone mode, the control unit will extract them to the correct file # # # # if they are separated by 0 # # # #. When removing the check is not carried out of existing files. F7 ( Ram) Main-Util-RS232- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - RS232 - RAM) This function is used to download programs from the RS-232 to the RAM disk, and then drive to the RAM DNC. Note: RAM disks of more available as an option. F5 (Tlchg) Main-Util-Tlchg (Main Screen - Utilities - Tool change) F5 (Tlchg) - is an option for machines with automatic tool changing devices. If the machine has a rotary tool changer, you will see the following panel keys.
When you press the keys F1 (CW) (clockwise), F2 (CCW) (counterclockwise) or F3 (Home) (starting position) the number of active tool is reset, indicating that there is no tool in the spindle. F1 (CW) F2 (CCW) F3 (Home) F5 (Open) F6 (Close) store moves one position clockwise store moves one position clockwise Store results in the initial position opens the door of the tool changer closes the door of the tool changer
If installed on the machine tool changer with swinging arm, following keys are displayed.
128
RunTime = Period Main-Util-TlChg-Slots = Utility main screen-changer tool-slots Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Pocket = slot Correction: canceled Tool = Tool Instrument: Spindle Spindle = Length: Current pocket = the current slot Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Edit = edit; Dflt = default; Esc = exit
F1 (Edit) (Edit) tool allows you to change the number in each nest. . With the F3 (Dflt) (Default) numbers are loaded by default the tool (tool 1 in slot 1, the tool 2 in slot 2, etc.). Use F7 and resets the tool number in the spindle. F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC) Mode F6 (DNC) (DNC) is used to run large programs. These programs are not loaded into the memory control unit, so they do not have a transition team (GO-TO), cycles, WHILE-WEND, GO-SUB command or commands call (CALL). 129
F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Fast mode) After pressing the F3 (Fast) (Fast Track), the following screen appears.
RunTime = Period Main-Util-DNC-Fast = The main screen-Utilities-DNC-Fast Track Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Select the input mode Correction: canceled Instrument: Missing pulses account: 0 Length: Power: 0 Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: File = file; Disk = disk; Any = any; Old = current; Ram = memory; Skip = skip; Mirr = mirroring; Abort = interrupt
130
F1 (RS232) By pressing the F1 (RS232) is activated by waiting for data from the Com-port, and then prompted the beginning of the cycle to start the program. F2 (File) (File) With the F2 (File) menu, select the program from the programs in the control unit. F3 (Disk) (Disk) With the F3 (Disk) program is selected from a menu of programs on a floppy disk or from LAN. F4 (Any) (Any) The key F4 (Any) allows you to enter the name of any disk route and file extensions. F5 (Old) (Existing) Key F5 (Old) allows you to enter the file number you want to run. F6 (Ram ) (RAM) F6 (Ram ) is used if the program is loaded from disk memory (via RS-232 or a floppy disk). With F6 (Ram ) will be selected by the program. After you select INPUT (input), the control unit will ask to press the start button to start the program cycle. All of the above modes of input - except for the RS-232 - allow to run the program from other places other than the beginning. There are also the following options. F1 (First) (First) F1 (First) runs the program from the beginning. F2 (Block) (Block) F2 (Block) runs the program with a serial number. F3 (Tool) (tool) F3 (Tool) starts with the numbers of the instrument. F4 (Cont) (Continued) The key F4 (Cont) allows you to start from the place where it interrupted the DNC earlier. When a file is interrupted, the file position is saved. Not carried out checks of whether the operator switched the number of files or change file DNC. Use the F4 (Cont), execution will continue from the file position, which was interrupted by any. F9 (Skip) (Skip) F9 (Skip) asks for a pass pulses account. If the bill does not pass the pulse is zero, the request will be made in the run cycle of missed (or ignored) of the number of blocks, and then the second loop will be executed starting from the next block.
131
RunTime = Period Main-Util-DNC-Fast = The main screen-Utilities-DNC-Fast Track Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled SECTION 6 ..... Number details: Abort = interrupt
When the program is completed or a key is pressed ESC (Abort) (Termination), the screen will display the total time of DNC, the total distance, average flow rate, average power and average units / second.
132
133
F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info (Home Screen - Utilities - Information) F8 (Info) shows information about the software, hardware, etc. The following function keys are displayed.
F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Standard) F1 (Std) shows the standard information as a representative in the next window.
134
135
The first line of the version of the front panel. The next two lines are a few abbreviations and numbers: AK RT TO SR SS NK DC PE TL CL Confirmation received from the sensor / controller keyboard Repeated transmission received from the sensor / controller keyboard Timeouts for transmission to the sensor keyboard, the keyboard controller found Repeated sending fragments - timeouts detected NC Sending fragments - the standard keyboard to send a probe Nonconfirmation found the keyboard controller The value of the DAC spindle sent to the transmitter keyboard Parity error detected by the keyboard controller Time limits detected by the keyboard controller Pressing Control, received by the keyboard controller (Used to indicate the inconsistency of data / command)
136
NC Centurion VI 6.6206r ROM: RAM: Processing program details: Showing: Floppy disk: Remote files:
Note:
File Route reboots, which displays the above information. So you can edit the file path, and then restart it using this command. If route processing program details and / or remote file has been modified from the menu, they will be saved back to the original route of the PATH.DAT. Version of the above #. # 169 route have a floppy disk and route remote files. Route the floppy disk is used specifically to save and load settings.
137
RunTime = Period Main-Util-Time = Utility Main Screen-Time Active = Active Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance NC Centurion VI 6.6206r Correction: canceled Information on the clock at 100% Instrument: Length: Implementation: Diameter: Submission: Plane: Faster movement: Clearance: Distance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Std = standard; Sys = systematic; Fp = front panel; Path = path; Time = time; Ram = memory; Diag = diagnosis; MISC = additional parameters; Done = done
The screen above provides information on the timing for the last audited program. Shown period of time suggests that correction of the feed rate is 100%. RUN (Running) gives the total time, FEED (Feed) - the time of milling (G1, G2, G3), and RAPID (Fast Moving) - during G0. All the time expressed in hours: minutes: seconds. The distance means the total distance traveled in inches or millimeters.
138
NC Centurion VI 6.6206r The contents of RAM: ... To continue, press any key
F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag (main screen - Utilities - Statistics - Diagnosis) With F7 (Diag) displays the following screen, which shows the diagnostics of the machine just before the emergency stop. F7 is used mainly for diagnostic purposes to determine the cause of the emergency stop. The user can view the status of inputs and outputs for each axis.
139
F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank (Home Screen - Utilities - Blank) F9 (Blank) makes the screen blank. With this feature removed written to the CRT image. The screen will remain blank until such time as there is no any key is pressed. The screen will be cleared automatically and remain empty until such time until any key is pressed. Shutdowns block tool change, a request to start cycle, etc. activate the screen, the operator will be given a hint, then the screen will again be cleared. There is also a timer to clear the screen if the key is not pressed within a specified period of time. See information about the parameter of time to turn off the display on page 65, Section 2. F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command (Home Screen - Utilities - Team) If the parameter Misc (Optional) Name of the team is not empty, the first 5 characters will be displayed pressing F10. When the F10 key is pressed, the command will be executed. If you need a few commands can run a batch file. See more information on this page 67. Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV (Main Screen - Utilities - Reverse the screw) When you press and hold this key is reversed screw. It is used to help eliminate jamming systems chip removal. The screw will move in the opposite direction until the button is depressed. The screw will not move (forward or backward) if the door is opened or the machine is in an emergency stop.
140
141
142
Event 0 of 2 Bytes: 130 088 960 118 of Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes:
143
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Position The feed rate [accelerated] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis
Note: See more information about the positioning of page 271, Section 4. Below is an interactive screen for positioning in a polar coordinate system.
Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 84 out of 800 522 240 Position The feed rate [12]
144
Note: See more details about the polar setting lines on the page 273, Section 4. F2 (Mill) Main-Prog-Conv-Mill (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Milling) When you select F2 (Mill) appears next panel function keys.
F1 (Start) Mill-Start (Milling - Start) Screen F1 (Start) is used to start the continuous cycle of single-or multi-row routing. Milling begins at the first depth Z, and continues to decline to step Z, until it reached a final depth of Z. Interactive tool to puncture the screen and start cutting cycle is as follows.
Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 125 894 656 118 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [] 1st depth of Z [] Step Z [] X point of puncture X [] Puncture point Y Y [] Correction [off] Options [---]
145
In the beginning of the milling cycle usually follows the geometry, but in the end - the event "end mill cycle" (End milling cycle). Correction of the cutting tool is activated on the screen below.
Event 1 of 3 bytes: 168 of 125 894 656 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .25] Step Z [.25] X point of the puncture x [0] Puncture point Y Y [0] Correction [Left] [Cartesian] Before the puncture x [1] Y [0] Options [---]
Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 215 125 894 656 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1]
146
Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 215 125 894 656 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .25] Step Z [.25] X point of the puncture x [0] Puncture point Y Y [0] Correction [automatic left] Options [---]
F2 (Geom) Mill-Geom (Milling - Geometry) When you select F2 (Geom) appears next panel function keys.
147
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [off]
Note: See more details about positioning on the page 271, Section 4.
148
Calculation of speed and feed The diameter of the cutting tool (inch) Cutting width (inches) Cutting speed (ft / min) Number of cutters Chip thickness (inches) Spindle speed (rpm = r / min) The feed rate (ipm = inches / min)
After entering the data in the first five fields will be given the recommended feed rate and spindle speed. Below is an interactive screen for positioning in a polar coordinate system.
149
Note: See more details about the polar setting lines on the page 273, Section 4. When set to Extend Back [ON] (Elongation in the opposite direction [inc.]), The following screen appears.
Event 7 of 10 Bytes: 423 886 848 358 of Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [---] Elongation in the opposite direction [short] angle [110]
Note: See more information on the back line on page 289, Section 4. Interactive screen for lines with a rounded corner is shown below.
150
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End of [rounded the corner] Radius [.15] Elongation in the opposite direction [off]
Note: See more details about rounding the corners on the 287, Section 4. Interactive screen for lines with land listed below.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate F [20] Coordinates [Cartesian]
151
Note: See more details on the corners with chamfer on page 288, Section 4. F2 (Arc) Mill-Geom-Arc (Milling - Geometry - Doug) Screen F2 (Arc) is used to perform circular interpolation mode supply. Sample of an arc Below is a dialog screen plane XY, the center of the increments, circular interpolation clockwise.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [20] The direction [clockwise] Center [Centre increments] Center of the arc I [1] Endpoint [absolute] A Y Z The final option is [---]
Note: See more details about circular interpolation on page 274, Section 4.
152
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [ZX] The feed rate F [10] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [2] Center of the arc ZC [0] Endpoint [absolute] A Y Z The final option is [---]
Note: See more details about circular interpolation on page 274, Section 4. A sample of the arc 3 Below is a dialog screen plane XY, Polar Center, helical interpolation counterclockwise, with a rounded corner.
153
Note: See more details about the description of the arc with polar coordinates on the page 273, Section 4. Sample 4 arc Below is a dialog screen plane XY, only the radius, circular interpolation clockwise.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the radius] Arc radius R [2] Endpoint [absolute] A Y Z The final option is [---]
Note:
See more details about the description of the arc with the radius of the page 276, Section 4.
154
The general sequence of the above form is as follows. Event 1 Event 2 Event 3 The line L1 The function of the tangent line or arc, describing an arc R1 and L2 line or arc 3 Doug R2
155
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY] Milled first arc in the direction [clockwise] R1 XC1 The second arc is to calculate: R2 HC2 Exit 1st arc [left] and enter into the second [left] Connect the [line]
Note: See more details about the tangent line at p 414, Section 6. Arc Tangent Below is an interactive display of the tangent arc.
156
Note: See more details about the arc of a tangent on page 414, Section 6. F4 (CGen) Mill-Geom-CGen (Milling - Geometry - Generator circles) For use F4 (CGen), the function generator circles to fill in any three points on the arc. These three points will be used to calculate the center and the radius of this arc. Below is a dialog screen for the generator circles.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616 The generator of the circles with three points The plane [XY] The direction [clockwise] X1 ... Y2 ... Z3 ... Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [yes]
157
Event 5 of 5 Bytes: 280 788 992 201 of Home treatment of islet Islet [1] The point of puncture X [2] The point of puncture Y [3] Correction [automatic, left]
The screen begins to process the island there is no information about the Z. All dimensions are in the cycle Z began milling. The island is called a screen cutting cycle completion.
158
Event 6 of 6 Bytes: 219 280 788 992 Completion of processing of the island Point to the details after the removal tool [Automatically]
Below is a sample program that uses a cutting cycle with cleaning grooves and islands. Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P7878 Event 0 out of 16 Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -
159
160
161
162
163
164
Note: See more information about cleaning up the deep grooves on page 401Section 5. F3 (Misc) Mill-Misc (Milling - More options) See explanation on page 249, Section 3. F4 (End) Mill-End (Milling - End) Screen F4 (End) is used to complete the previously started cutting cycle. Completing the cycle cutting cycle with no beginning or the beginning of cutting cycle, cutting cycle without end milling will lead to a syntax error when you run or test program.
165
andNO
This may be due to the start of the cycle without end milling cutting cycle. Cycle removal tool, complete milling andNO Start cutting cycle = ERROR # 601 WHILE there is no operator
This may be due to the completion of the cycle without cutting cycle start milling. Below is an interactive tool for removing the screen at the completion of milling cycles.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 54 146 374 656 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling Forward to the part after the removal tool [Cartesian coordinate system] X [0] Y [1] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet []
166
167
168
169
170
Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 124 878 848 406 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Clean grooves 1] Feed rate XY [20] Cutting width [.1] Final allowance [.01]
The following graphic is a top view of an example program using the routing options are a clear cut-outs in the cycle began milling tool with a puncture.
Note: See more information about cleaning up the deep grooves on one page 401, Section 4.
171
Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 252 124 878 848 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Clean grooves 2] The number of passes [5] The width of cut [.125] Enter a negative width of cut for finishing pass
The following graphic is a top view of an example program using the option of milling grooves 2 in the treatment cycle began milling tool with a puncture.
Note: see more detailed information about clearing the cut-outs on page 2 401, Section 5 2. Note: This option can also be used to clean the frame of the cutting cycle. To use the option finishing pass initial data for the tool radius rough passage can exceed the actual radius of the tool, in this case to achieve the proper tool radius using two passes with a negative width of the 172
Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 337 of 124 911 616 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.25] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Tapered Wall (spherical cutter)] The angle of the wall [20]
In the following graphic representation is given a sample program using the option of milling tapered walls in cycle beginning with the piercing tool milling.
173
Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 498 124 911 616 of Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [20] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-2] 1st depth Z [0] The increment of Z [.1] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right] Options [Round the walls (spherical cutter)] The radius of the wall [2] The initial angle [0]
174
175
176
0 - a vertical wall, 90 - is impossible. Rounded wall also has an option for end mill. To be able to use the curved walls of the correction must be activated on the cutting tool. First depth of Z should be the top of the wall. The first pass is adjusted for the entire radius of the tool. Note: See more information on the rounded walls of the page 396Section 5. F5 (Pockt) Mill-Pockt (Milling - Deep excavation) When selecting F5 (Pockt), a function of milling of deep cavities, the following panel keys.
F1 (Setup) Mill-Pockt-Setup (Milling - Deep groove - Installation) Screen F1 (Setup) is used to set the parameters needed for the programs of milling round, rectangular and polygonal cavities. Setting must be done before any milling grooves programs. Cleanup dredging hand does not require the installation screen. The cycles start and end milling not should be used with programs of milling deep cavities. Note: All automatic standard milling program must be activated with the instrument in the heart of the program.
177
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Installing the software milling of deep cavities A center of the notch [1] Center recess Y [2] Feed rate XY [20] The feed rate puncture Z [10] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .2] The increment of Z [.25]
Note: See more information about standard milling of deep cavities programs on page 295,302 in Section 4, and page 401 in Section 5. F2 (Circ) Mill-Pockt-Circ (Milling - Deep groove - Round) When you select F2 (Circ) appears next panel function keys.
178
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Cleaning the deep recesses of round Notch radius [4] Finishing allowance XY [.01] Finishing allowance Z [.01] Cutting width [.25] Z down [incision] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)] Correction [inc. ]
Note: See more information about clearing the round cut-outs on page 295, Section 4.
179
Event 6 of 18 Bytes: 895 out of 1,023,932,928 Internal finishing round of deep grooves Notch radius [1.3] Z down [Line] Corner [3.5] Areas of cut [counter-clockwise (counter-milling)] Correction [inc. ]
Note: See more details about the internal finishing the round cut-outs on page 296, Section 4. F3 (Rect) Mill-Pockt-Rect (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular) When you select F3 (Rect) (Milling rectangular recesses) appears next panel function keys.
180
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Cleaning deep rectangular grooves Size of excavation X [2] Size of excavation Y [4] Finishing allowance XY [.01] Finishing allowance Z [.01] Cutting width [.25] Corner radius [.5] Z down [incision] Correction [inc. ] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]
Note: See more information about cleaning up of rectangular cut-outs on page 302, Section 4.
181
Event 2 of 4 Bytes: 138 of 237 010 944 Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves Size of excavation X [2] Size of excavation Y [3] The radius of curvature of the vertices [.3] Z down [incision] Correction [inc. ] Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]
Note: See more details about the internal finishing of rectangular recesses on page 304, Section 4. F3 (Face) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Face (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Ends) Below is an interactive screen for loop ends.
182
F4 (Manul) Mill-Pockt-Manul (Milling - Deep groove - Clean by hand) The function is used to manually clean grooves to the operator was able to move the tool on a graphic screen and create a tool path with the arrow keys (move tool) and press enter (to select points). To add the manual points interactively select F2 (Mill) - F5 (Pockt) - F4 (Manul). Screen cleaning recesses in the manual mode is as follows:
Event 1 of 16 Bytes: 366 of 215 711 744 Cleaning the deep recesses in the manual mode The feed rate puncture Z [] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance [] The final depth of Z [] 1st depth of Z [] The increment of Z [] Number to use the tool [] After pressing the F1 (Store) (Save) to increase the area you want to clear, then click on Help (Manul) (Manual). Use the cursor keys to the tool, use the key Enter (Enter) to select positions.
The fields on the screen similar to the beginning of the cycle of milling. Number of tool used to graphically display the tool (the diameter of the tool in the tool table). After filling out the fields
183
When the operator leaves the graphics mode, the control unit stores the point, as the cycle of cutting, using the 1st point in the cycle as the initial start of milling. The remaining points are stored as lines. Event end milling cycle persists after the last line. Note: To use this feature it is recommended that the operator has programmed the region, requiring manual data, and grooves put in the function of cleaning by hand before the geometrical parameters to be cleaned. F5 (Polyg) Mill-Pockt-Polyg (Milling - Deep groove - Polygonal) Below is an interactive screen for polygonal milling cycle of deep grooves.
184
Note: See more details about the cycle of cutting polygonal cut-outs on page 309, Section 4. F6 (Frame) Mill-Frame (Milling - Frame) When choosing F6 (Frame) (frame) appears next panel function keys.
F1 (Setup) Mill-Frame-Setup (Milling - Frame - Installation) Screen F1 (Setup) (Set) is used to set the parameters needed for automatic programming cutting round and rectangular frames. Installing the program should be carried out before any cutting program framework. The cycles start and end milling not should be used with programs of cutting the frame. Note: All automatic standard milling program must be activated with the instrument in the heart of the program. All standard automatic routing software framework can be used to determine the G65 X___Y___ center.
185
F2 (Circ) Mill-Frame-Circ (Milling - Frame - Round) Below is an interactive screen for milling round outside the scope counterclockwise.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Outdoor finishing the round frames The radius of the framework [4] Z down [incision] Correction [Off. ] Areas of cut [counter-clockwise (dial.)]
Note: See more information on finishing the round outer frame on the page 298, Section 4.
186
Event 2 of 2 Bytes: 206 1023932928 The inner loop cutting deep grooves of polygonal Size of the frame X [2] Frame size Y [4] The corner radius [.05] Z down [Line] Corner [3.5] Correction [inc. ] Areas of cut [clockwise (counter-milling)]
Note: See more information about the external finishing of rectangular frames on the page 307, Section 4. F5 (Poly) Mill-Frame-Poly (Milling - Frame - Polygon) Interactive screen for processing polygonal outer frame is as follows:
187
Note: See more details about the cycle of cutting polygonal frame on page 309, Section 4. F7 (3dPkt) Mill-3dPkt (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions) When you select F7 (3dPkt) appears next panel function keys.
F1 (Start) Mill-3dPkt-Start (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - Home) Use the F1 (Start) (Home) is called the next dialog screen to start the cycle pazvertki in 3 dimensions.
188
Notes on the cycle of scanning in 3 dimensions Note 1: Note 2: If the initial angle sweep = sweep the final corner, the arc will not be formed. Negative angles indicate the initial covering part, the positive initial angles - for the male part.
After filling out the home screen 3D next step - it is programming the desired path using only lines and arcs. These should be entered through screens Mill-3DPkt-Line or Mill-3DPkt-Arc. Once introduced XY profile details using the above cycle will be scanning the arcs in this plane along the lines of pre-programmed, or XY, until the cycle is completed the sweep by the events unfolding in the decontamination cycle of 3 dimensions. The net result of this cycle is the rotation of the programmed contour in the XZ plane XY, or YZ. In the case of the bottle mold bottle only has to be programmed in the plane XY, and then rotated in the YZ plane or XZ.
189
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 854 343 368 Deactivation of sweep cycles in 3-dimensions.
A sample program using the Scan cycle in 3 dimensions Installing the software The name of the program [] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---] Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -
190
191
192
Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 89 out of 109 510 656 Subroutine call three-dimensional arc Turning to the trajectory of the sub, including the outside of the plane of the arc. Does not support the correction to the cutting tool or trigonometric help. All arcs must be the absolute center. The plane [XY to Z] Clearance [] Starting point X [1] Y Z The initial angle [0] The angle increment of [-5] The called routine [826] Number of cycles [36]
193
194
195
196
F8 (CAD) Mill-CAD (milling - CAD) Importing CAD files in the devices CNC milling machines Milltronics. The control unit has the ability to import files to CAD (. Dxf or. Cdl) directly in the interactive program. With this possibility created by the events of lines and arcs that define the geometric parameters of the details. Creating a CAD drawing to be imported. Imported only lines and arcs. The text, splines, polylines, dimension data, boundary drawings are not imported. When you create a file milling CAD geometric parameters of CAD file to form a continuous path from start to finish, with no gaps between objects. There is a parameter that controls the search distance that the control device will be used to find the next object. It is located in the parameters of F7 (Parms) - F1 (Setup) - F1 (Level) - F5 (Misc) and designated as CAD EPSILON. It is necessary to edit the parameter to a value that will work with the files CAD (recommended from 0.0003 to 0.0005). The following is an entry screen for CAD.
197
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Mill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Milling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Route CAD file Correction: canceled CAD File Name Instrument: Enhanced CAD file Length: Diameter: CAD file will be displayed after clicking on the Plane: F1. Press the F1 (Path) (path) to select the starting Clearance: point and direction of the cut. Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Input = input; Menn = menu; Strip = delete; Esc = exit;
According to the introduced above route CAD file DXF file will be imported from the "C: \ CK19 \ DXF". You can specify any valid path to the file allocation drawings CAD. Use the F2 (Menu) (Menu), you can select the item from the list of all files stored in the control unit or any of their CDs. When the light is the key F3 (Strip) (Delete), the control unit will delete the file from Z CAD. This is useful for 2-axis geometry. To import the size of the Z key to switch from F3 (Strip) (Delete) that it has not been activated. The only valid option for the field of file extensions CAD - a. DXF and. CDL. This field is set by default DXF. If you want, you can adjust the MISC (optional) so that the default standing CDL.
198
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Mill-Verf-Graph = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Routing-CheckGraphical Active = Active Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Path = path; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = exit
After selecting the key F1 (Path) (trajectory), the control unit will prompt the operator to select the starting point for the trajectory. The starting point is selected by moving the crosshair to the desired location using the arrow keys F7 - F10 (you can also use buttons move the jog) and press F5 (Enter) (Enter) (or you can use the Enter key on your keyboard). After the initial point is selected, the control unit will prompt the operator to select points in the desired direction of cutting. This point is chosen by the same procedure. The control unit uses these two points to create a path.
199
Event 9 of 9 Bytes: 317 of 422 576 128 Thread milling cycle Center for X [] Center Y [0] The initial depth [0] The final depth of Z [-1] Threads per unit [10] Gap [.1] The feed rate [50] Part of the wall [internal] The direction of the thread [right] Correction [inc. ] Passages [forward-] Thread type [cylindrical] Diameter [2]
200
Note: See information on the correct combination of the correction to the cutting tool, cutting directions on page 312, Section 4. F3 (Drill) Drill (Drill) When you select F3 (Drill), the following menu.
All cycles must begin drilling before the end and after the last hole. This is done by pressing F1 (Start) (Start) and F5 (End) (End).
201
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 96 out of 406 159 360 Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2]
Note: See more details about the cycle of drilling on page 360, Section 4.
202
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 99 out of 402 259 968 Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle with a pause] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5]
Note: See more details about the cycle of drilling / pause on page 360, Section 4. Drill / drill bits with a periodic output Below is an interactive screen for drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill.
203
Note: See more information about the drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill on page 361, Section 4. Struzhkolomnoe drilling Below is an interactive screen for struzhkolomnogo drilling cycle.
Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 108 724 224 134 of Activate the drilling cycle [Struzhkolomny drilling cycle] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] The gap in the periodic output bits D [0.2] Step periodic output bits U [.2]
Note: See more details about struzhkolomnom drilling cycle on page 354, Section 4.
204
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 398 032 896 191 of Activate the drilling cycle [Boring Cycle] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2]
Note: See more details about the cycle of boring on the page 363, Section 4.
205
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 219 402 227 200 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring with a pause] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5]
Note: See more details about the cycle of boring with a pause on page 369, Section 4. Boring 2 The following shows the dialog screens bore 2.
206
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 281 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Accelerated boring] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2]
Note: See more details about the accelerated cycle of boring on the page 364, Section 4. Fine boring
207
Note: See more details about the cycle finish boring page 356, Section 4. Contact boring
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 315 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Contact boring] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] The initial depth of the R [.1] The final depth of [-2]
Note: See more details about the feedback loop boring page 365, Section 4.
208
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 343 of 396 361 728 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Boring manual] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.6]
Note: See more information about the boring cycle manually on page 359, Section 4.
209
Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 108 724 224 184 of Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2] [Tsekovanie] The feed rate puncture F [5] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25] The increment in Q [.25] Feed rate XY [7] Correction of the cutting tool [inc.] Radius tsekovki [1]
Note: See more details about the cycle tsekovki page 363, Section 4.
210
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 488 of 396 034 048 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [A soft tapping on the right] The feed rate puncture F [20] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth of [-2] Pause before turning in [.2] Pause after the rotation R [0]
Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for soft tapping on the right page 362, Section 4.
211
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 488 of 396 034 048 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [A soft tapping on the left] The feed rate puncture F [14.2857] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] The final depth [-2.5] Pause before turning in the [0] Pause after the rotation R [0]
Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for soft tapping on the left of page 355, Section 4.
212
Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 206 243 236 864 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option)] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]
Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for rigid tapping on the right page 367, Section 4. Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left
213
Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for rigid tapping on the left of page 367, Section 4. Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right with a periodic output bits
Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 243 138 560 241 of Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] The first deep V [- .5] The increment in Q [.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]
Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine threaded holes on the left of page 367, Section 4.
214
Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 130 of 105 644 032 Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw] [Rigid Tapping on the left (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill] Threads per unit of F [14] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200] Point of Return [Gap] Clearance R [.1] Depth [-2.5] The first deep V [- .5] The increment in Q [.5] Pause after the rotation R [0]
Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine threaded holes on the left of page 367, Section 4. F2 (Pos) Drill-Pos (Drilling-positioning), F3 (Misc) Drill-Misc (Drilling - Options), F4 (Call) Drill-Call (Drilling - Call) Use the F2 (Pos) displays screens of positioning. They are used to input the provisions of the drill.
215
Event 2 of 2 Bytes: 78 out of 198 508 544 Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X axis X [1] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] Mesh openings [---] Openings to the intervals [---]
The screen shown above - is the screen of one of the holes for drilling. One hole will be drilled or cut in the (1,2). If the field Z is entered in this screen size, will be drilled at the depth of the new (1.2) and subsequent holes. If only the size of the typed appears in the Z, Z-axis move to this position, the hole is not drilled and the depth of Z does not change. This can be useful for cleaning fixtures or fasteners.
216
Event 3 of 5 Bytes: 395 608 064 187 of Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X axis X [1] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] The grid of holes [yes] The number of columns [6] The number of lines [5] The interval between the columns [1] The interval between the rows of [.75]
The figure above shows the screen position when drilling with option grid holes. Grid will be drilled holes 6 x 5 with an interval of 1 "X-axis and 0.75" along the axis Y. The first hole at (1,2). Below is a grid pattern of holes created by this phenomenon.
217
Event 3 of 5 Bytes: 151 3956440832 Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X axis X [1] The axis Y Y [2] The axis Z Z [] Openings to the intervals [yes] The number of holes [6] The interval between the columns [1] The interval between the lines [.75]
With the above screen will be created following the grid holes.
218
In this screen does not need anything to enter, but it must be stored in the program to stop the cycle of active drilling. If the screen is not saved, every action will cause the loop drilling on the axis Z. F6 (CAD) Drill-CAD (Drilling - CAD) Importing CAD files in the devices CNC milling machines Milltronics. The control unit has the ability to import files to CAD (. Dxf or. Cdl) directly in the interactive program. With this feature imported circle defining the position for drilling. Creating a CAD drawing to be imported. From CAD file is imported to drill only a circle.
219
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Drill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Drilling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Instrument: Route CAD file Length: CAD File Name Diameter: Enhanced CAD file Plane: Gap: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Input = input; Menn = menu; Strip = delete; Esc = exit;
According to the introduced above route CAD file DXF file will be imported from the "C: \ CK19 \ DXF". You can specify any valid path to the file allocation drawings CAD. Use the F2 (Menu) (Menu), you can select the item from the list of all files stored in the control unit or on any of the disks. When the light is the key F3 (Strip) (Delete), the control unit will delete the file from Z CAD. To import the depths of the Z key to switch from F3 (Strip) (Delete) that it has not been activated. The only valid option for the field of file extensions CAD - a. DXF and. CDL. This field is set by default DXF. If you want, you can adjust the MISC (optional) so that the default standing CDL.
220
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Drill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Drilling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: canceled Diam. = Diameter of Instrument: Holes = hole Length: Diameter: Plane: Gap: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min) Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceled Choose the hole that you want to drill. Pause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: Start = start; Set = setting; Reset = Reset; All = all; None = no; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = end; Drive = CD
Use the function keys to select the desired holes. After pressing the F1 (Start) (Start) are included in the selected hole drilling cycle. The operator can change the feed rate for drilling depth and drilling cycles are different.
221
Example of drilling program Event 0 out of 17 Installing the software The name of the program [Example of drilling programs]
Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [ ] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 17 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change Number of tools Description of instrument Number of the next tool [Cut] X [] Y [] T [1] [DRILL] []
Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- 222
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [2] Y [] (Z to 2 ") Z []
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [] Y [] Z [3] (Z to 3 "to go to clip)
223
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [5] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z []
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 17 Decontamination of drilling cycle -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 17 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change [Cut] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [2] Description of instrument [BORING] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise]
224
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [2] Y [] (Z to 2 ") Z []
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 13 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X []
225
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 14 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [4] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z [-1]
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 15 of 17 Positioning for drilling The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis [Faster] [Cartesian] X [5] Y [] (Z to -1 ") Z []
Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 16 of 17 Decontamination of drilling cycle -------------------------------------------------- Event 17 of 17 End of program Spindle off [Yes] Coolant off [Yes] Z to the tool change [No] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) [] Note: See more information about the group cycles on page 345, Section 4.
226
227
228
Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]
229
230
231
232
Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]
233
234
235
236
Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]
237
238
239
240
241
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 877 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [Rigid Tapping on the left side (optional)] Threads per unit of P [10] Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [400] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] Depth [-2] Pause after the turn of P [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 713 of 380 862 464 The cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option)] Threads per unit of P [10] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [400] Point of Return [Gap] Gap R [.1] Depth [-2] Pause after the turn of P [0] Center bolt hole [-1] [1] The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counterclockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0] Number of openings carried out [6] Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]
242
The example program execution bolt holes Event 0 of 3 Installing the software The name of the program [The example program execution bolt holes]
Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 3 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change Number of tools Description of instrument 243 [Cut] X [] Y [] T [1] [DRILL]
Angle of 1st hole Number of holes running Number of holes at 360 degrees.
-------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 3 End of program Spindle off Coolant off Z to the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [] []
244
Notes: See more details about the program execution bolt holes in the p 351, Section 4. And drilling cycles, and cycles run bolt holes dialog entry screens will be different versions of the software below # .116. They also translated into other languages and in English translation # .110. The input fields are the same in all versions of the software, but the appearance and the stages of transition to the input screen is slightly different. For each cycle in older versions of some keys appear to the programmer can choose the type of cycle to be done, and not the field to the desired switching cycle, which is available in more modern versions. If the interactive program is created in an older version of the drilling cycle or run bolt holes, it can be edited in the new versions of software. However, if the interactive program is created in a more modern version of the drilling cycle or run bolt holes, it can not be edited using older versions of software. Fatal Error 100 "Disk read error" (error reading disk) will appear when trying to run a series of drill holes or run under the bolts of a new type of interactive program using an older version of the software. If the program is interactive with the cycles of drilling holes for bolts execution of a new type is edited in older versions of software, and a fatal error 100 is issued, the control unit will incorrectly change the text in the program. It will destroy the event, which contains a series of drill holes or run a new type of bolt. The control unit generates program text corresponding to the input data in an interactive program, and the text program will run machines. Time is a program that creates a control device is identical for both types, so you can edit and execute in the new and old versions of software, no matter in which it was created.
245
Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 209 out of 1,023,932,928 Change of tool Tool [Challenge] Tool number T [1] Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit] Spindle speed S [600] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] Screw [---]
246
If you make a tool change position Z-axis is in the tool change position or higher, moving XY is produced before any movement on the axis Z. If Z is lower than the position tool changer, Z moves to the position of the tool changer, and then will move X and Y. If the number of X and Y are not introduced during the tool change will only move Z. The field numbers next tool is used to change the device for instruments installed in any slot. The holder of the instrument will produce a next-indexing tool during the cutting of the active tool. Note: See more information about the tool change on page 390Section 5.
If the machine is equipped with a chip removal system, the option will be available to enable (or disable) the screw, and while it is running.
247
248
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Additional Features Spindle speed S [] Team spindle [---] Team coolant [OFF]. Correction [off]. Stop command [the program] The team return [from XYZ to 0] Cutting [---] Programming mode [absolute] Working coordinate [---] The feed rate F [] Additional line: []
249
F7 (Call) (Call) The screen program call is used to transfer the program to another program for a certain number of cycles. Below is a dialog screen to invoke the program.
Event 2 of 4 Bytes: 105 644 032 291 of Calling the program Program number [900] Options [cycles] Number of cycles [2]
If the number of cycles in the field is empty, the routine is called once. Note: See more information about the calling routine on page 402Section 5.
250
Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 108 of 105 578 496 Calling the program Program number [900] Options [Grid] 1st position of the X [2] Y [3] Number of columns [5] The number of rows [4] Intervals X [3] The intervals Y [3]
F8 (Spec) (Specifications) These screens are designed to install or configure various parameters of the CNC Centurion. The parameters control various functions such as tool offset, scale factors, rotation angles, mirroring, floating zero and the parameters listed in Appendix A. The following keys.
251
Event 1 of 1 Setting
When loading a parameter set to the specified amount. When adjusting the parameters specified value is added to the current configuration. F2 (Tools) Spec-Tools (Specifications - Tools) Below is an interactive screen for setting tool offset.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Installing the tool offset (Note: This will affect only a tool, currently active) Type of installation [download] Correction of the instrument D [.25] H [.75]
Note: See more details about the correction of the length of the tool on page 331, Section 4.
252
253
254
F4 (Scale) Spec-Scale (Specification - Scale) Below is a dialog screen to activate the zoom.
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the scale factor Scale [On]. The scaling factors [regulation] Correction of the instrument D [.1] H [.15]
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the scale factor Scale [Off].
Note: See more information about installing and cancel the zoom to page 332, Section 4.
255
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Set the angle of rotation Turn [On]. The angle of rotation of AA [45] Start turning X [0] Y [0] Z [0]
Note: See more details about the rotation of the coordinate system on page 338, Section 4. Below is an interactive screen for setting the angle of rotation in three dimensions.
256
Rotation in three dimensions is used to rotate the parts out of the plane.
257
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the mirroring Mirroring [On]. Axis mirroring X [0] Y [0] Z [0]
Note: See more information about installing and cancel mirroring on page 344, Section 4.
258
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Install a floating zero The axis X [0] Y [0] Z [0]
259
260
Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 225 705 984 113 of Text [On the arc] direction [clockwise] Center the text X [1] Y [2] The radius of the text [1] The initial angle [200] Clearance R [.1] The depth Z Z [- .03] The feed rate puncture ZF [20] Feed rate XY F [20] Text size X X [.3] Text size Y Y [.3] A string of text [MILLTRONICS]
F9 (Subs) (Sub) These screens are used to define and call subroutines. Displays the following keys:
261
Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 62 220 725 248 Go to subroutine Number of sub [1] Options [cycles] Number of cycles [15]
Another option is to go to the sub-screen is used to call a subroutine and its repetition in a right manner.
Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 of Go to subroutine Number of sub [1] Options [Grid] 1st position x [0] Y [0] Number of rows [4] The number of columns [3] Intervals X [3] The intervals Y [2.5]
262
Event 2 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 of Starting routines Number of sub [1]
F3 (End) Subs-End (Sub - Conclusion) Complete screen subroutine determines the end of the subroutine.
263
Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 12 Change of tool Tool The situation in the tool change [Cut] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [600] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 12 Go to the subroutine Number of subroutines Options 1st position [1] [Grid] X [0] Y [0]
Number of rows [4] Number of columns [3] The interval X [3] The interval Y [2.5] -------------------------------------------------- -
264
Number of rows [4] Number of columns [3] The interval X [3] The interval Y [2.5] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 12 Starting routines Number of subroutines [1] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 12 Installing the software milling of deep cavities Center recess X Y center of the notch [0 ] [0 ]
Feed rate XY [10 ] The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ] The final depth of Z [- .4 ] First the depth Z [- .1 ] The increment of Z [.1 ] -------------------------------------------------- -
265
[incision] [counter-clockwise (countermilling)] Correction [inc.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 12 The completion routines -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 12 Starting routines Number of subroutines [2] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 12 Text [On the arc] direction [clockwise] Center the text X [0] Y [0] The radius of the text [1 ] The initial angle [180 ] Gap R [.1] The depth Z Z [- .03] The feed rate puncture Z Feed rate XY Text size X Text size Y F [20] F [30] X [.3] Y [.4]
A string of text [MILLTRONICS] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 12 The completion routines -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 12 End of program Spindle off [No] Coolant is turned off [no] Z to the tool change
[No]
266
Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 End of program The spindle is turned off [yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [yes] Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) []
267
Active powerFast positioning Linear interpolation The circular / helical interpolation clockwise The circular / helical interpolation counterclockwise Pause Exact stop Data Set incl. Installing the data off. Cleaning the floating zero The XY plane The plane XZ or ZX The plane YZ Input in inches Input in metric units How to disable the safe zone Enable checking the safe zone Cleaning the deep recesses of round X
Modal X X X X
Disposable
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
G20, G21, G22 and G23 are selected on the parameters at power on.
268
269
270
Note: Unresolved G-code cause an error 549. Interpolation functions There are four types of interpolation: G0 Rapid traverse, linear G1 Submission, linear Fits G2, clockwise G3 arcs counterclockwise Positioning (G00) with rapid movement (modal) For example: G0 X3 Y2 G00 indicates the positioning during fast movement. You do not need to program the speed of fast moving, because the rate parameters are given in advance. You can adjust speeds to quickly move through the switch feedrate override button on the machine operator. G00 moves the tool with the increased speed in the working position on the coordinate system for both incremental and absolute for the teams. Format: G00 ~ -; Where ~ - is: a combination of optional addresses axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C), such as XYZA-...
271
Note: Rapid traverse in the G00 command is set separately for each axis of the machine manufacturer. Thus, the rate of rapid movement can not be specified in the address F. In positioning mode that is activated with G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined level at the beginning of the block and slowing at the end of the block. Execution continues in the next block after the confirmation of a given situation. Given position means that the position of the axis is within the specified limits. (These limits are defined by the manufacturer of the machine.) In the G00 acceleration and deceleration occur automatically, linearly, which provides a smooth start and stop controlled axis. The intensity of the acceleration / deceleration can be changed by the manufacturer of the machine. Positioning (G01) Movement of feed (modal) For example: G1 X5 Y2 (control unit at the beginning of each program is the default mode in the G1.) This command mode is activated by linear interpolation. The feed rate is set at the address work through F and is modal. Here is an example. (G91) G01 X20 Y10 F20 The feed rate specified by the address F, is the vector velocity on trajectory, it is not the speed of each axis. Commands for flow rate of the linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) are sent using the numbers after the address F (FXXX.X). Location F can appear anywhere in the block, it indicates the velocity in inches or millimeters per minute. 272
Feed per minute can be adjusted by pressing the correct feed rate on the remote machine operator from 0 to 140% (for each 10%). Correction of filing can not be applied to the functions for which the correction is not allowed (for example, the cycle of tapping). Determination of polar The polar radius is determined by the polar / length (R), angle (AB) and polar center (AA or I, J, K, or XC, YC, ZC). Definitions are valid in any of the polar plane. Position "3 hours" is always 0 . Positive angles cause counterclockwise rotation (0 ) with respect to the polar radius, while negative angles lead to a rotation in a clockwise direction (0 ) with respect to the polar radius. Polars can be used in determining the length of time, using the trigonometric. If the polar radius / length (R) or angle (AB) is not specified, will use the previous values. If the polar center is not specified, it is taken as the current state of the machine. Below is a few examples.
273
Circular interpolation (G02, G03) Below is the general format of commands to move through an arc of a circle. G17 G18 G19 G02 X Y I Jor XC YC R or R or XZIK or XC ZC R G03 Y Z J K or YC ZC R or AB R * (3 or 6) * (4 or 5) or or or AA R F R or R or AA R F AA R F
* (1) * (2)
* (7)
* These numbers are given as references in the following diagram. Plane Choose Direction Radius and / or center G17 G2 R XC YC (or ZC) XY (or Z) G18 G3 R AA AB G19 I J (or K) XY (or Z) WC R or-R End point F The feed rate
274
Determination of polar Inputs 5 The radius of the arc The initial angle 6 7 8 The final angle The feed rate By the line R AA AB F W, C TEAM VALUE The radius of the arc The angle from the center to start The angle from the center to the end point in a clockwise direction Speed along the arc Angle
275
View from above, before the positive direction of axis Z, Y or X to the negative direction in the plane XY, XZ, YZ or ZX in the right-handed Cartesian coordinate system. Method I Description of the arc with the center of the incremental The end point of the arc indicates the address X, Y or Z, and expressed as absolute or incremental value, depending on the G90 or G91. In incremental mode, the coordinate of the end point is the starting point of the arc. Center of the arc is defined by I, J and K for the X, Y and Z. The numeric value that follows the I, J or K, is the distance from the starting point to the center of the arc from X, Y, or Z. I, J and K are always incremental values are independent of the G90 and G91. The sign of I, J and K depends on the ratio of the center to the starting point, as shown below.
Method II Description of the arc with radius In describing an arc with radius values are several existing formats. Here are the formats of the various teams. G17 G18 G19 G02 or G03 X____ X____ Y____ Y____ Z____ Z____ R____ R____ R____
276
Endpoint
STARTING POINT
Note: If the arc can not override the start and end points, you get an error 505 "Radius too small to span given points" (the radius is too small to cover the data points). Method III Description of the arc through the center and the absolute trigonometric aid G17 G18 G19 G02 or G03 X___ X___ Y___ End point Y___ Z___ Z___ XC___ XC___ YC___ YC___ ZC___ ZC___ R___ R___ R___
Radius
277
Programmed path
Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X4 Y4 (the estimated start point) G2 R2 XC7 YC2 X10 Y4 (estimated end-point) G1 X15 Y0 The trajectory generated by a program
278
Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X2 Y1 (the estimated start point) G2 R1.5 XC4 YC2 X5 Y6 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 X5 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program two
279
Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X7 Y6 (calculated starting point) G2 R1.5 XC4 YC2 X5 Y.2 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 X5 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program three
In general, when working with lines and arcs, if the line is programmed, not reaching the arc, it will be stretched to the arc. If the line is programmed for the arc, it will be reduced to the arc, and if the line does not intersect the arc tangent is to be done.
280
Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X2.5 Y2 (calculated starting point) G2 R1 XC5 YC4 X5 Y5 (calculated You are Hereth point) R2 XC7.5 YC5 X9 Y8 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 X9 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program 4
281
Programmed trajectory G1 X0 Y0 X2.5 Y2 (design point) G2 R1 XC5 YC4 X5 Y3 (calculated You are Hereth point) G3 R2 XC7.5 YC5 X9 Y5 (calculated You are Hereth point) G1 Y0 The trajectory generated by the program 5
In general, when determining the intersections of the arcs with the arcs of the easiest to find one of the points of a quarter circle (0 , 90 , 180 or 270 ).
282
Identification can be used with the trajectories of the line to a circle, circle to circle and circle to the line. Center and radius of the arc can not be determined. For the line to the circle and the circle to the line calculated start and end points have lie on a line, ie slopes lines, incoming and outgoing arc must be true. If the line intersects the arc at two points, the calculated point should be closer to the desired point of intersection. If the above conditions are met, there are no limits on how far from the calculated point correct. In determining the intersection of the arc on the other one is easiest to find on the arc of one of the points a quarter circle (0 , 90 , 180 or 270 ).
The following briefly describes the correction to the cutting tool and the trigonometric help when trigonometric aid is used for the tangent line to arc. The sample program: G41 D1 G65 X1 Y8 X0 Z-1 X0 Y0 X2 Y6 (This line is made of the tangent.) G2 R3 XC7 YC3 X12 Y6 G1 X15 Y0 Y8 X0 G65 X0 Y0 Z0
283
Block X2 Y6 derived tangent to the arc. When correcting for the cutting tool has been taken into account the previous two lines and calculated on the basis of the adjusted point of the baseline, not a tangent. When using the corrected trajectory for this program will not be stripped right thing. To avoid this problem, you should check off the program with the correction on the cutting tool (Or radius of the tool set to 0). Mark the actual point of contact (X4.8276, Y5.0690). Replace this point the calculated point (X2 Y6). This is not a problem for the other tangent line in the program. Method IV Description of line with the definition of polar Definitions polar do not change from absolute to incremental. Center of the arc is always considered a pole, and all the angles refer to it. The basic definition polar the following. G17 G18 G19 G2 or AA_____ AB_____ R_____ G3 start angle end angle range
Finite angle
RADIUS
284
A. The absolute coordinates (polar, trigonometric No aid) G90 G1 X0 Y0 X4.2929 Y4.2929 G3 R3 AA295.53 AB357.59 G2 R4 AA77.56 AB318.59 G1 Y0 X0
285
286
287
288
Back C2 W165
Increases line in the opposite direction from (0,0) Uses the intersection with the arc, the most distant from the (0,0) Increases line from (0,0) at an angle of 165
C0 Uses near the intersection of X0 Y0 X3 Y1 G2 R1 XC3 YC0 X3 Y-1 G01 X0 Y0 BACK C0 W135
289
W135
This line does not intersect with the arc, so the line will be rotated until, until it becomes a tangent. X0 Y0 X3 Y1 X4 Y0 X0 Y0 BACK C0 or C2 W165
In this example, the return line is used between the two lines for programming an unknown point.
290
Note 5:
Screw cutting (G02, G03) Helical interpolation is activated by specifying a different axis, which moves in sync with the circular interpolation. That is, the tool can move in a spiral. G02 G17 or G03 G02 G18 or G03 G02 G19 or G03 R____ X____ Y____ or Z____ F____; I____ J____ R____ X____ Z____ or Y____ F____; I____ K____ R____ Y____ Z____ or X____ F____; J____ K____
291
The above format for helical milling illustrate the overall concept. Any of the previous format of the arcs can be used for screw cutting simply by adding a third axis endpoint of the arc to the team.
Address F determines the feed rate along the arc of a circle. Therefore, the feed rate of the linear axis of the next. The length of linear axis F x ______________________ The length of arc Determine the feed rate so that the feed rate on a linear axis does not exceed any of the thresholds. The team paused (G04) Code G4 should immediately follow the instruction FXXX.X. This statement will then stop or pause the program at XXX.X seconds. The general format: G4F2.5 cause a pause in the program in 2.5 seconds. G4F25 cause a pause in the program for 25 seconds. Note: A, P or X can be used instead of F after the command G4. Exact Stop (G09) Displacement, which are given to the team in blocks with G09, slowed at the end point, and checks in the operating position. This function is used when sharp edges are required to work the angles of the workpiece when applying.
292
Teams, in addition to P *** = value in the mode of G10 will cause an error 543 "Illegal G10 statement." (Invalid operator G10). When you run a G11, the CNC will use the new settings. See the destination parameter in the Appendix. Cleaning the floating zero (G12) With this function, removed floating zero. (G12 in the program cancels the floating zero, but they are restored at the end of the program. G12 in manual data entry removes floating zeros.) The plane XY (modal) (G17) Selects the XY plane for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G17 command can appear anywhere on the line. The control unit is always included in the mode of G17. The control unit is set to the default G17 at the beginning of each program. The plane XZ (modal) (G18) Selects the XZ plane or ZX for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G18 command can appear anywhere on the line. The plane YZ (modal) (G19) Selects the YZ plane for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G19 command can appear anywhere on the line. Inch size mode (Modal) (G20) With this function, the system goes to the inch mode. In this mode, the system receives the size in inches. You can select active at power on. G20 cancels the G21.
293
294
** For all automatic programs G41 and G42 do the same thing: they include a correction to the cutting tool. In the example shown in the right direction for correcting the cutting tool. The control unit will adjust the appropriate standard in all automatic programs, if the correction is included in the cutting tool (G41 or G42). Counter / normal milling indicated G2 or G3. *** If the first is less than the depth Z final depth of Z, Z depth of the first set to a final depth of Z. Note: You can also use the following. P140 = zone for the safe return P141 = depth Z for final P142 = entry-level Z P143 = for the increment of Z P144 = 1 for the first depth Z P145 = feed rate to Z
295
HOME / END
TOOLING UP
HOME / END
Block # Information on entering the block Block # Information on entering the block N9 G2 G42 N9 G3 G41 Block 9 Selects a circle in a clockwiseBlock 9 Selects the circle direction and includes an adjustment to the against clockwise and cutting tool to the right includes an adjustment to the cutting tool left Internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25) If the specified radius of the tool, adjust the cutting tool can be used in all standard automatic programs. The control unit automatically reduces or increases the tool path with tool radius.
296
Finishing allowance ** XY and Z finishing allowance is reset at the beginning of each program. Internal finishing with a range of hours. hours with. Internal finishing the circle against the
Start / End
Start / End
297
Note: Parameter P150 - is the radius of the recess. If you do not need finishing allowance, P153 and P154 parameters must be set to zero. F20, programmed in the N5, a feed rate of XY, and F5 in N9 affects only the flow on the axis Z. If the settings on the value, they do not change and can be used in the program in the future. When you call the automated routine, any parameters that are not reinitialized, the default will be on the previous parameter value. Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves (G26) Automatic routine is identical to the G26 on the basis of the program G25, except for the fact that it produces cutting round the outside of the tide, rather than inside. Since the G26 requires positioning the outside of the tide, will apply the following formula to calculate the distance from the center of the tide to the point of puncture / removal. Distance = 0.1 + Circle + [3 X tool] radius of the radius
Program outside of finishing the round of deep grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P150 = 1 (tidal radius) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) G26 G98 G41 G2 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 298
The outer circle on the finishing part of. Outer finishing the circle against the hours with.
Center TIDE Center TIDE
TOOL UP / DOWN
TOOL UP / DOWN
299
Return to the zero point (G28, G29, G30) These commands provide the administration of the machine to a fixed point (zero point) with the passage through the first intermediate point on the way to zero. First, a fixed zero point in XYZ is inserted through the front panel of the parameters the zero point. The zero point corresponds to the zero point of the machine. When this point is set, it remains unchanged as long as no other team will be replaced by the front panel. Each time you issue the command G28 or G30 machine will be returned to the designated zero point. Positioning in the intermediate and the zero point is made during fast movement. If the G28 or G30 is executed without specifying the axes, they will not be influenced. If one or two axes are controlled as intermediate points, only the steering axis will move to an intermediate point and the zero point. If the intermediate point is programmed, the program will remember it until the next G28 will not run (ie for use in the G29). The command format. The zero point is set to X-10 Y0 Z-0.1 Example 1: Example 2: Example 3: machine) Example 4: X-3 Y2 Z-8 G28 Z-7 G29 Z -7, Then Z-0.1 (Relative to the zero point of the machine) from Z to -7 G28 G91 (No movements of the axes) G28 Z = 0 (from Z to -0.1 relative zero point of the machine) X3, then the X-10 (Relative to the zero point of the
X1 Y0 Z-2 G28 X3
The command G29 - this transformation G28. G29 machine returns to the programmed point through the last waypoint, saved command G28. The command format. G29 X____ Y____ Z____ programmed point
300
INTERMEDIATE POINT
X1 Y1 Point A G28 X3 Y2 Point B, then the point R G29 X6 Y1.5Point B, then point C G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point This function works similarly to return to the starting point G28, except that you can call the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point. The command format. G30 P2 X____ Y____ Z____ G30 P3 X____ Y____ Z____ G30 P4 X____ Y____ Z____ zero point intermediate point Unless otherwise specified P, may be P2. P < 1 and P> 5 are not valid, and lead to error 542 "G30 illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block" (G30 invalid return to the zero setting on the block G30).
301
Cleaning deep rectangular grooves (G34) Automatic routine G34 is used to clear deep rectangular grooves, starting from the center and paving the way to the final size. Jobs similar to the work program of the automatic processing programs circular cut-outs, except for the fact that the cut out a rectangle with rounded corners. In the program for rectangular grooves added parameters P151 (the size of the excavation X) and P152 (the size of the excavation Y). Parameters P150, P153, P154 and P155 retain the same meaning as in programs for circular cut-outs. Dimensions X and Y are the dimensions seizure, and if the radius is set to 0, the corners will be cut along the radius of the tool. 302
303
If the N11 - G42 G2, the direction of the cut in a clockwise direction. If the N11 - G41 G3, the direction of the cutting counter-clockwise. Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves (G35) Automatic routine G35 is used for removal of finishing allowance remaining after the cleaning program of deep rectangular grooves, or it is used for removing a certain amount of allowance around the inside of the rectangle. Automatic software works similarly to the program G35 G34. It starts in the center. The circumference of the middle to the end of the program will always go along the longest side of the recess. The program of internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 r / min, calls to corrections to the tool number 1) G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P522-2.5 (bevel angle) P150 = .25 (radius) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) P151 = 4 (the size of the excavation X) P152 = 2 (the size of the excavation Y) G35 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 *1*2*3*3*4*5 *6*7*8*9 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 *7 Performs internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves Returns the Z in the area of safe return Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left Area safe return Bevel down the Z The final depth of Z First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe return minus the increment of Z)
304
305
Internal finishing of CS Internal finishing of CS A rectangular recess X <Y A rectangular recess X> Y P151 <P152 P151> P152
Information about the input line Block # Information about the input line G3 G41 selects N10 G3 G41 selects counter-clockwise direction counter-clockwise direction direction and correction to the cutting direction and correction to tool left tool left Interior. clean. treatment against CS Rectangular with rounded notches angles and X> Y P151> P152
Internal finishing against the CS Rectangular Angles and X < Y P151 <P152
306
Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves (G36) Automatic routine G36 is used for removal of finishing allowance around the outside of the square of the tide. The program works similar to G36 G34 manner. It starts in the center, performs a quick move to the outside of the details, then submit the tool down. The circumference of the edge is always at the bottom of the tide. CNC uses the following formula to calculate the distance from the center to the point of the bottom feeder. Y = (3 X tool radius) + .1 + the width of the groove Y
SIZE A The radius of curvature (P150)
The tool path CONCERNING THE ARC The tool radius + .050 (P150) Point of Puncture / DRAINAGE The tool radius
Program outside of finishing deep rectangular grooves G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 r / min, calls to corrections to the tool number 1) G00 X0 Y0 (rapid movement in the X0 Y0) G98 (Z returns to the initial level) F20 (feed rate X-Y) P150 = .25 (radius) P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z) P151 = 4 (frame size X) P152 = 2 (frame size Y) G36 G41 G2 V-.25 R.1 Z-.5 Q.25 F10 P199 = 0 *1 *2*2*3*4*5*6*7*8 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 Performs exterior finishing of deep rectangular grooves Clockwise from the left or "G42 G3" counter-clockwise to the right First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe return minus the increment of Z) Area safe return The final depth of Z The increment of Z 307
Block # Information about the input line input line N11 G3 G42 selects the direction of counterclockwise and correction on the cutting tool on the right
CENTER
CENTER
TOOL UP / DOWN
TOOL UP / DOWN
Tapping (G39) Automatic routine G39 is used for threading. You can program the internal or external thread. G39 works with the same principles as the G25, interior finishing round of deep cuts, and G26, exterior finishing round of deep grooves. If programmed with an internal thread, the program automatically starts in the center of G39 and moves, as shown in the following diagrams.
308
HOME / END
HOME / END
For internal thread starting point is the center of the thread when switched on and off at the correct cutting tool. If programmed with external thread, it starts in the center and moves rapidly to the point of low feed using the following formulas for the correction off the cutting tool. X = radius of the thread + [2 X radius of the tool] + 0.1 When correcting for the cutting tool at the control device using the following formula to calculate the point of reducing the supply. X = radius of the thread + [3 X radius of the tool] + 0.1 For external thread the machine moves, as shown in the figures below. Male / Male Right / Left
Start / End
The cycle performance of the polygons (G666) Automatic G666 standard program used for cutting out polygons (shapes with the same parties), such as triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, etc. The cycle performance of the polygons can be used for indoor or outdoor cutting. The internal implementation of the polygons in the middle and begins to spiral turns to the form, then cut in a spiral polygon and returns to the center. Outer polygons have positioned in the center (or use
309
310
311
(The angle of the cone half-angle, or defined by the angle with the center line, 0 for a cylindrical thread) P122 = 10 (Threads per unit) P123 = 1 (1 for internal threads, 2 - exterior) P125 = .03 (The increment / decrease in diameter, zero for a single pass) P126 = 2 (The final diameter for multiple passes) ** P127 = 0 (Center X) P128 = 0 (Center Y) P150 = 1.91 (The diameter of the cylindrical thread pitch diameter for tapered threads and multiple passes) G39 G42 G2 Z-1 V0 R.1 *1*2*3*4*5*6 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6 Runs thread milling cycle Correction of the cutting tool [Off. (G40), left (G41), right (G42)] *** The direction of the thread (G2 right, G3 left) *** The final depth of Z (P141) First depth of Z [(P144, if V is not specified, the control unit calculates the 1st depth of P140 (Zone safe return) minus the P143 (the increment of Z)] Area safe return (P140)
** For multiple passes on the inner diameter of the thread must be less than the final start. On the contrary, for multiple passes on the outer diameter of the final carving must be less than the initial one. The right combination of *** and correcting the direction of the cut on the cutting tool: G42 G2 for domestic right-hand threads. G41 G3 for the internal left-handed threads. G41 G2 for the outer right-hand threads. G42 G3 for the outer left-handed threads. Correction of the cutting tool (G40, G41, G42) G40 Correction off. G41 Correction of the left G42 Correction to the right This section explains how the correction of the cutting tool, and provides advice on its optimal use. Correction of the cutting tool - the offset tool paths - perpendicular to the programmed path - an amount equal to the radius of the cutter. The programmed path may be defined by the
312
313
(B)
non-zero diameter
The solution shown above for the details - is the introduction of the bevel or rounded angle 00.0001 "point 5 between disjoint surfaces. An explanation of how to be introduced facet 00.0001 "to solve the problem of non-intersection Note: ", C", used for chamfering, can only be applied between the two lines.
In some cases, the system detects the intersection, but it will be too distant from the details. Again, in such cases to address must be entered chamfer or a rounded corner of 00.0001. "
314
START
Note: A point of correction (4 ') is shifted to a greater extent than the radius of the tool (4). The figure below shows how the chamfer or a rounded corner of 00.0001 ", added to (4), prevents unnecessary deviations. The solution for the outer "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool
ADDED CHAMFER 0.0001
The figure below shows how the adjusted point for the inner "V"-shaped cavity is programmed to point at a distance exceeding the radius of the tool.
315
DETAIL
TOOL
Note: The tool is separated from the programmed point (2) at a distance exceeding the radius of the tool. If the adjusted point (2 ') was closer to (2), the tool would be plied by the details. Test sample details Because the system requires three points to determine the adjusted points, caution should be exercised when the correction is on the cutting tool is enabled or disabled. Magnitude to move the axis at the exit or entrance to the detail of to be greater than the expected value of the correction on the cutting tool. Figure 1 shows under the stage that the position of the machine at the point (1) is the same as in the corrected and uncorrected trajectories of the tool. This is because the first point can not be corrected because it does not have a previous point to form a group of three points needed for the correction program. Therefore, the correction should be included to how the tool will enter the work area. For ease of programming tools to enter and leave the details of the zone perpendicular surface of the part. This is not a strict requirement, but it simplifies the understanding of how the correction of the cutting tool will operate at the entrance and exit from the zone of the workpiece. If there is doubt as to how it will look offset tool path, we recommend hand-drawn sketches of lines parallel to the surface of the part from start to finish or use a press F6 (Both) (Both) for verification. The most common problems are detected immediately.
316
START
Endpoint
STEP 1
Step 2. Draw a line shifted from the surface of the radius of the tool parts from point 1 to point 11.
STEP 2
317
STEP 3
Step 4. Since points 1 and 11 have adjacent points on one side, they will not be adjusted. Therefore, you should connect them to neighboring points adjusted to get to the actual trajectory of the displaced incisor.
STEP 4
318
STEP 5
Step 6. Notice how the points 1, 2, 10 and 11 gradually shifted. The result is as follows.
STEP 6
Note:
Now we see that when the tool is moved from (2) (3) and (9) (10), the angle will be cut properly.
319
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
320
In the figure above, the tool should be lowered to a point 1, and then raised back to the point 5. Point 1a is added to the system of providing preliminary information on the line 4-5. Length from 1a to 1 may be in the range 00.0001. "It is important to note that preliminary information correct angle 1a to 1 should be the sameAs the angle 4 to 5. In this case, the angle is zero. Similarly, the point 5a is added to provide a system previous information on the line 1-2. Again, the angle of 5 to 5a should be the sameAs the angle of 1 to 2. Regardless of the radius of the cutter, the tool can now be lowered to the corner at (2) and raised back at 5.
321
Blocking the movement (G65) G65 is used to start and complete correction of the cutting tool. Through code G65, located on a line with coordinates, these coordinates will be used for the correction of points on the cutting tool, but will not be taken into account during the movement of the machine. G65 X___ Y___ Z___ The machine will not move to the coordinates XYZ.
Note: G65 can be used as the polar and Cartesian coordinate system. G65 R____ AB____
322
323
EVACUATION A =the last position before outlet 2 =challenge the position of the tool 3 =point after removal
ON. PREVIOUSLY
TOOLING UP
ON. PREVIOUSLY
ON. PREVIOUSLY
ON. PREVIOUSLY
ON. PREVIOUSLY
324
ON. PREVIOUSLY
TOOL DOWN
TOOLING UP
ON. PREVIOUSLY
ON. PREVIOUSLY
ON. PREVIOUSLY
ON. PREVIOUSLY
325
correction in the dir. the tool is turned off, the point of blocking traffic at the exit tool up
Note that the tool enters and leaves the details of the area, touching both walls because of the line G65. Notes on the correction of the cutting tool Note 1: Inclusion of the correction can be made both in the block without moving along the axis and in the block containing the axis movement. There is no limit to how many consecutive blocks may not have information about the axis. There are no restrictions on how the line and out of the zone edges. They can have any angle of intersection until the intersection there.
Note 2: Note 3:
326
Note 5:
Note 6:
Note 7:
Note 8:
327
In the above cases, the tool will move in the opposite direction, as he tries to settle down, touching the walls of the groove or V-shaped depression.
In this case, the error will be issued "Compensated line / arc do not intersect" (Adjusted line / arc does not intersect.) Automatic correction of the cutting tool (G45, G46, G47) Commands for automatic correction of the cutting tool, G45 (automatic correction to the left), G46 (automatic correction to the right) and G47 (automatic correction off.) Act mainly as a normal correction commands to the cutting tool, using the previous, current and next programmed point to calculate the adjusted current point. They differ only by way of correction of the first and last pre-programmed points. The control unit automatically calculates the previous programmed point for the first points of the adjusted and the next programmed point for the final adjusted points. These points are calculated in such a way that adjusted the trajectory starts and ends at the points where the radius of the tool is removed from the first and last programmed point on the left (G45) or on the right (G46) side of the programmed path.
328
329
330
( or or A 2 3 4
G17 XY H-plane to add to / subtract from the Z-axis plane G18 XZ H added to / subtracted from the Y-axis plane G19 YZ H added to / subtracted from the X-axis If the correction is activated in H-plane G17 XY, and then switches to the plane of the plane G18 XZ, correction will act, and still added to the axis Z. However, if another adjustment is activated by H is still in the plane of the G18 XZ, it will be added to the axis Y. Both the correction will act on an axis Z, and the other on the axis Y, until they are canceled with G49 or changed to another correction H.
331
In the G90, and G91 modes there is no aspect of how the correction of H added to the final position of the axis or subtracted from it. Cancel scaling (G50) Set scaling (G51) You can send a command to scale at any time during the program using the G51. The command format is: G51 I____ J____ K____ X____ Y____ Z____ I, J, K - is the center of scaling. If I, J, K are not in line G51, the center will scalability last used by default center. Center Zoom is set to 0 at the beginning of each program and after the G50. X, Y, Z are the scaling factors for each axis. The range of each of the scaling factor is up to 999,9999 000,0001. After installing the scaling factors are as long as the will not be changed or canceled with G50. At the beginning of each program, all scaling factors are set to 1.
332
P1 - P4 P1'-P4 ' P0
original program, lack of scalability scalable software Center Zoom Notes on Scaling
After installing the scaling is valid until until canceled with G50. If you scale the arcs using a scaling factor of the primary axis. At G27, G28, G29, G30 and G92 are not influenced by scaling factors. For the scaling of the axes of the same coefficient is used G51 P. G50 sets the scaling factors of 1, and centers on the scale zero.
333
334
Correction of G54 - G59 are not reset during power-up or after reduction to the original position. The control unit will remain in the chosen coordinate system, as long as you run your other G54-G59.
The local coordinate system (G52) The command G52 is similar to the G92 is that it uses a zero current coordinate system as its starting point instead of the current status of the machine (G92). When you use the G52 should be taken as a "shift position working with" X____ Y ____ Z____. Notes on the local coordinate system Note 1: G52 - a modal code, so after installation it will affect all systems of coordinates.
335
Note 5:
SYSTEM 2
336
G60 X___ Y___ G60 - is a single G-code, it is used instead of the G00. Notes for unidirectional positioning Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: The degree of departure from the pre-specified by the manufacturer of the machine. At the direction of the transition is not affected beyond the mirroring. If the manufacturer of the machine was set to "one-sided supply of G00 ("G00 unidirectional approach"), the same sequence position will be respected at every movement of G00.
Exact stop mode (modal) (G61) When the command is issued to G61, is slowing down the block to the end point of cutting and installing the operating position is relative to the next block. G61 is valid as long as there is no command is issued by the G63 (tapping mode) or G64 (cutting mode). Tapping mode (modal) (G63) When a command is issued G63, feed rate and the correction of spindle speed is ignored (always considered as 100%), and the mode of the block and stop filing do not apply. G63 is valid as long as there is no command is issued by the G61 (exact stop mode) or G64 (cutting mode). Cutting mode (modal) (G64) G64 is the default at the beginning of each program. When a team is slowing G64 on the basis of the angle between the blocks at the end point of each subsequent block, and the mode of cutting over to the next block. This command is valid for as long as no command will be G61 (exact stop mode) or G63 (tapping mode). Calling the program (G65 P) G65 can also be used to invoke the program. The called program is determined by P.
337
Notes on a call using the G65 program Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: If the program specified location P, does not exist, an error. The called program is rounded address value R. For example: G65 P12.75 (program number is 13) If in block G65 is not P, the block is not considered to block the move.
Note 4: Unspecified address set to -999. Rotate the coordinate system (G68) Cancel the rotation (G69) G68 can be used to rotate the model around a programmable predetermined central point. The plane of rotation is determined by the G17, G18, G19; the center of rotation is determined by the IJK, a turning angle - with the help of AA. The command format. G68 AA + _____ I____ J____ K____ AA + means anticlockwise AA-clockwise means
338
ANGLE OF ROTATION
CENTER TURN
G69 resets the rotation angle and the center of rotation. It should be used with caution in combination with the rotation of the other functions. We must carefully consider the use of features such as mirroring, scaling and correction of the cutting tool, along with the rotation. Here are some basic rules. A. Correction of the cutting tool should be disabled (G40), when the function is called rotation. (After the call to turn the correction on the cutting tool can be included).
Two. If scaling is included before the call rotation, the center of rotation will be scaled, if the function is called before the turn of the zoom, the center of rotation will not be scaled. Three. The procedure to enable or disable: the first inclusion, the last stop. G51. . . . Scaling incl. G68. . . . On a turn. G41. . . . correction in the cutting tool incl. . . . G40. . . . correction in the cutting tool off. G69. . . . turn off. G50. . . . scaling off.
339
Five. Rotation is always performed in the active plane. 6. 7. X, Y and Z can be used instead of I, J and K to the center of rotation. R can be used instead of AA for the rotation angle.
340
341
With the G69 cancels all corners, including the turn in 3 dimensions. Scalable and then turns the part
342
343
X, Y and Z axis is determined to be mirrored. Their values determine the distance from the zero current position to create a mirrored center line. After the G71 command must be at least one X, Y or Z. G71 X3.5 X4 Y1.5 X5 Y2.25 X4 Y3 Y1.5 G70
344
G70 Y0 Mirroring Y
G70 cancels mirroring. Mirroring on the same axis changes the counter and conventional milling. Mirroring the same axis scaling by -1. Group cycles The group makes the program loop, using a block to G-code to determine the processing operations are usually defined by several blocks.
345
G74
Feed
G75
Feed
Tsekovanie
G76
Feed
G77 G78 G80 G81 G82 G83 Feed Feed Feed The intermediate flow Pause spindle stop flywheel Pause Pause rotation of the spindle clockwise Stopping the spindle Moving in the XY Pause Pause The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of The accelerated movement of Feed Feed The accelerated movement of Feed The accelerated movement of Feed Feed
Drilling cycle of your choice The cycle of boring manual Cancellation Drilling cycle, zasverlovki loop holes Drilling cycle, the cycle tsekovaniya Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill The cycle of tapping The cycle of boring The cycle of rapid boring Feedback loop boring
346
Operation 2 OPERATION 6
The positioning is usually performed on the plane XY, and processing of the holes made by means of axis Z. When positioning and handling of the holes should be using this plane, and a combination of axes. Group cycles can be used in any plane. The operations of the group cycle consists of three basic modes, which are specified by certain modal G-codes, as shown below. (1) The data format (2) The level of the cusps (3) drill mode G90 Absolute G91 Incremental G98 level of the initial point G99 R-point level G73 G80 G81 .
347
The figure below shows how to specify the data in G90 or G91. Absolute and incremental programming
ENTRY-LEVEL
ENTRY-LEVEL
POINT R
POINT R
POINT Z ABSOLUTE
If the tool is returned to the R point or the initial level, it is indicated by G98 or G99. (See the figure below.) Use the G99 to the first hole, and the G98 - for the latter. When the cycle is repeated in a group mode, G98, the tool returns to the initial level after each hole. In the G99 initial level does not change, and the tool returns to the R point after each hole.
348
ENTRY-LEVEL
ENTRY-LEVEL
LEVEL POINTS R
LEVEL POINTS R
Data on drilling indicated after the G73, G74, G76, G77, G78, G81 - G89. The data is stored in the device management, as modal values for future use in other cycles. Data on the processing cycle in the group are indicated as shown below. G ____ X__ Y__ Drilling mode The data on the status of the holes Z__ R__ V__ Q__ P__ F__ Data on drilling
Drilling mode. . . See G__ __ table of the group of cycles. The data on the situation X Indicates the position of the holes on the incremental openings or the absolute value Y. The trajectory and speed of delivery are the same as in the positioning of the G00. Data on drilling Z. . . Denotes the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole with an incremental value or the position of the bottom of the hole with the absolute value. R. . . Denotes the distance from entry level to point R with the incremental value or the position of the point R by the absolute value. V. . . Indicates the first depth Z in the G73 and G83. Q. . . Represents incremental value for the G73 and G83. P. . . Denotes the time spent at the bottom of the hole. The relationship between time and the specified value is the same as for the G04. F. . . Refers to the feedrate. B. . . Denotes the exposure time to reverse the spindle in the soft mode, tapping the left or right.
349
Drilling mode (G__ __) remains unchanged as long as there is no other mode is specified, or a group drilling cycle will not be canceled with G80. After specifying the data on drilling in the group cycle, they persist as long as there will not be changed. All necessary data about the drilling must be specified when starting the cycle group, only the variable data must be specified at the time of the cycle. Group cycles are canceled at the beginning of each program. G73 - G78, G81 - G89 without moving along the axis will not perform drilling holes. G-codes include only the drilling cycle.
350
FIRST OF TREATMENT
STANDINGS
G81 R___ Z___ F___ G91 X___ Y___ L___ X___ Y____ represent the first and subsequent position openings in the incremental mode (G91). In absolute mode (G90) hole will be drilled repeatedly in the same position. K can be used instead of L to denote the number of holes. Execute bolt holes (G72) Automatic routine execution bolt holes can be used with any of the drilling cycle. Drilling cycles, if they apply to this automated program, characterized in that the hole positions are not specified. Line G72 indirectly identified all the provisions of the holes on the basis of special entry: the number of holes at 360 , the number of reams holes, the radius of the circle center of bolt holes, the initial angle of the first hole and the center of the circle bolt holes. The control unit then calculates the position of each hole and produce a rapid linear movement in every hole. Angle is the angle of the first hole of the position "at 3:00." Positive initial angle departs clockwise from the position "at 3:00." A negative start angle departs clockwise from the position "at 3:00." Note: Holes are drilled in a clockwise direction from the first position if the radius of the bolt holes is positive. Holes are drilled counter-clockwise, if the radius of the bolt hole is negative.
351
E 2-HOLE K NEGATIVE
Below is the format command G72. G72 X___ Y___ R___ Q___ P___ K___ position radius number of holes number of holes angle circle in center of hole 360 Drilling first bolt openings openings bolt The program for the drilling of a circle with a 5 bolt holes with a radius of 1 " N1 N2 N3 G20 G90 (Inch / absolute) S1000 M3 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise, 1000 rev / min, activates the correction to the length of the tool number 1) G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10 G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10 N4 Boring Return to point R The drilling depth The plane R Feedrate Z
G72 X0 Y0 R1 Q5 P5 K0 G72 The standard program execution bolt holes X0 Y0 Center in X0, Y0 R1 Radius 1 inch Q5 5holes in the 360 P5 Drilling of 5 holes K0 The initial angle of 0
352
353
POINT R Z, ZERO
POINT R Z, ZERO
POINT Z
POINT Z
G73 G98/G99 Z___ R___ V___ Q___ U___ D___ F___ The command G73 represents the cycle of high-speed drill with a periodic withdrawal of the drill. With this cycle is executed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point V Fast moving up to a value of U Fast moving down to the value of D Filing down the value of Q is either a point Z (whichever is less) Repeat steps 3-5 until you reach the point Z Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99 Team V optional. If you miss it, the first depth is equal to R___ - Q___.
354
Spindle CCW
POINT R
POINT R
POINT Z POINT Z PAUSE Spindle clockwise PAUSE Accelerated movement WORK FLOW Spindle clockwise
G74 G98/G99 Z___ R___ B___ P___ F___ The command G74 represents the cycle of soft tapping on the left. Each axis position in this cycle is executed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Eight. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause before the reversal (indicated by code B) Reverse spindle rotation (clockwise) Pause after the reversal (indicated by code P) Submission to the point R Reverse spindle rotation (counterclockwise) Fast moving to the starting point, if you see code G98
During the tapping switch feedrate and spindle speed adjustment is ignored. In block mode, the cycle does not stop until until it is finished carving. If you use a feed, or just stop stop, stop the tap when it is outside the hole. The calculation of feed and speeds for threading A STATUS = STEP QTY / min X STATUS = feed rate
355
For proper operation metchikoderzhatelya may need to adjust the feed rate. If you tap in the chuck is too drawn out, the feed rate should be increased. If the tap is pushed into the chuck, the feed rate should be reduced. Tsekovanie (G75) Tsekovanie identical to the cycle of internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25). It always performs a counter-milling (counterclockwise). It always performs infeed to the center (not linear). It can be used in schemes under the bolt holes and other drilling patterns.
POINT R Z, ZERO
POINT R Z, ZERO
POINT Z
POINT Z
F__ (Feed rate XY) P150 = __ Radius tsekovki P503 = __ O - correction of the cutting tool off., 1 - Correction to the cutting tools inc. G75 G98/G99 Z__ R__ V__ Q__ F__
356
Note 1: The command is optional V. If you miss it, the first depth is equal to R__ - Q__ Note 2: You can cut normal (clockwise) with mirroring. Cycle finish boring (G76)
Spindle clockwise
STARTING POINT
Spindle clockwise
POINT R POINT R
PAUSE
POINT Z
PAUSE
POINT Z
Accelerated movement WORK FLOW OSS - ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP OFFSET (acceleration)
The displacement
The distance and angle are adjustable parameters to control the angle of the holes and the distance to it.
357
Specialized drilling cycle (G77) This is a specialized drilling cycle. It can be used to loop specified by the user. The cycle must be set to G-code, G79. For example: G77 R.1 Z-2 X1 Y2 (does what and G79) Y-2 (does what and G79) . . . X3 (does what and G79) G80 Specialized drilling cycle can be used in the execution cycles bolt holes, equally spaced grid of holes or openings. If the G79 - no special code, you get an error 549, unrecognized G code (an unidentified G-code).
358
Spindle clockwise
STARTING POINT Spindle clockwise POINT R PAUSE / STOP SPINDLE / FLYWHEEL PAUSE / STOP SPINDLE / FLYWHEEL POINT Z POINT Z POINT R
G78 F____ P____ R____ Z____ G98/G99 The teams represent the cycle G78 Boring manual. In each of the following axis position in this cycle will happen next. A. Two. 3. 4. Five. 6. 7. The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause on P seconds Stopping the spindle Log in flywheel mode (user can use the flywheel manually control axes, enable / disable the spindle, take the tool, etc.) Exit from the flywheel by pressing Enter or ESC The accelerated movement of the holes in the point R / starting point
Cancellation of group cycle (G80) Group Cycle (G73 - G78, G81 - G89) is canceled, and then, work in normal mode.
359
STARTING POINT
POINT R
POINT R
POINT Z
POINT Z
G81 G98/G99 Z___ R___ F___ The team represents drilling cycle G81. In this cycle is executed as follows. A. The accelerated movement of the point R Two. Filing down the point Z Three. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99 Drilling cycle / pause (G82)
STARTING POINT
POINT R
POINT R
PAUSE
POINT Z
POINT Z PAUSE
360
POINT R, Z, ZERO
POINT R, Z, ZERO
POINT Z
POINT Z
G83 G98/G99 Z___ R___ V___ Q___ D___ F___ The command G83 drilling cycle stands with periodic withdrawal of the drill. This cycle is performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point V Fast moving up to the point R Fast moving down to the value of D Filing down the value of Q is either a point Z (whichever is less) Repeat steps 3-5 to then, until you reach the point Z Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99
361
G84 G98/G99 Z___ R___ B___ P___ F___ The team represents the cycle G84 tapping on the right. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Eight. Note: The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Pause before the reversal (denoted by team B) Reverse spindle rotation (counterclockwise) Pause after the reversal (denoted by a team of P) Submission to the point R Reverse spindle rotation (clockwise) . Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98
During the tapping switch feedrate and spindle speed adjustment is ignored. In block mode, the cycle does not stop until until it is finished carving. If you use a feed, or just stop stop, stop the tap when it is outside the hole. Feed and speed for tapping A STATUS = STEP QTY / min X STATUS = feed rate
For example:
1/4-20 taps, the number of rev / min spindle 400 1/20 = 0.05 (stroke) 400 x 0,05 = 20 (flow rate)
362
STARTING POINT
POINT R
POINT R
POINT Z
POINT Z
G85 G98/G99 Z___ R____ F___ The team represents the cycle G85 boring. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. The accelerated movement of the point R Submission to the point Z Submission to the point R Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98
363
Spindle clockwise
STARTING POINT
Spindle clockwise
POINT R
POINT R
G86 G98/G99 Z___ R___ F___ The team represents the cycle G86 boring fast. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. Starting the spindle (clockwise) The accelerated movement of the point R Filing down the point Z Stopping the spindle The accelerated movement of the point R Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined by G98/G99 Starting the spindle (clockwise)
364
Spindle clockwise
POINT R
TOOL
G87, G98 F____ R____ Z____ The distance and angle indicated by the control parameters of the "back corner holes" and "distance to the rear corner of the hole." The team represents a feedback loop G87 boring. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows. A. The orientation of the spindle Two. Accelerated movement in XY (with parameters CTRL, used in G76) Three. The accelerated movement of the point R (usually at the bottom of the hole) 4. Move to the starting position XY 5. Starting the spindle 6. Submission of up to a depth of Z 7. The orientation of the spindle Eight. Move to XY (determined by the rear corner of the hole and the distance to the rear corner of the hole)
365
366
G88 G98/G99 Z____ R____ F____ P____ (Q____ V____) The command G88 stands rigid tapping cycle. P (pause) may be used if the distance between the holes is too small to provide time for spindle reverse its rotation in the right direction. This cycle is performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. 6. 7. The accelerated movement of the point R Submission to the point Z Reversing the rotation of the spindle Submission to the point R Reversing the rotation of the spindle Pause for P___ seconds Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98
367
Note 2:
Note 3:
368
STARTING POINT R
POINT R
POINT R
POINT Z PAUSE
POINT Z PAUSE
G89 G98/G99 Z___ P___ F___ The team represents the cycle G89 boring, with a pause. In each subsequent position of the axis in a given cycle will be performed as follows. A. Two. Three. 4. Five. The accelerated movement of the point R Submission to the point Z Pause at the bottom (indicated by code P) Submission to the point R Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98
Example program for drilling holes in the plane YZ. G19 G81 R.1 X-1 F20 (the depth of X -1) Y3 Z2 (drilling holes in the Y3 Z2) Z5 (drilling holes in the Y3 Z5) Y-1 (drilling holes in a Y-Z5) G80
369
Note 3:
370
CLIP
PROCESSING
Example of drilling: G90 G81 G0 R.1 Z-2 F10 (0.1 clearance for drilling, the depth of 2, Z 10 filing) X1 (drill holes at depths of -2 X1) X2.5 F5 (drill holes at depths of -2 X2.5, Z 5 flow) X3.5 Z-1 (drill holes at depths X3.5 -1) Z2 (Z to accelerate the movement to remove the 2 clips) X6 (drilling holes in the X6) X7 Z-2 (drilled hole at a depth of X7 -2) G80 (removal of drilling cycle)
USED STILL, WAITING FOR NORMAL SPINDLE ROTATION
Note 5:
If you use G76, G78, G86, G87 and G88 the distance between the holes is too small to insert a pause (G04) between the movements, to allow time for reversing the direction of rotation of the spindle. 371
G00 M___ G86 X___ Y___ Z___ R___ F___ G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) X__ Y___ G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) X__ Y___ G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) . . . . . . This can not be taken into account if the machine has the function of spindle acceleration. Note 6: Precautions operator a) A single unit When the cycle is carried out in a group mode, a single unit, the control unit stops at the end of Operations 1, 2 and 6. Therefore, it must run at least three times to drill one hole. Correction Allowed correction of the feed rate and spindle speed adjustment, equal to 100%, during the execution of the group of cycles G74 and G84.
b)
Absolute / incremental mode There are two modes of movement notation: G90 (absolute) denotes a fixed position, and G91 (incremental) denotes the distance from the current position of the tool. Absolute mode (modal) (G90) This function causes the transition to the normal control devices Absolute mode. In this mode, all sizes are calculated from a base point. This basic point can be either the original zero point, which is a fixed point on the machine, or a point on the working coordinate system defined by the operator. Due to the limitation table / slide XYZ dimensions relative to the original zero point can only be negative for the standard milling machines, manufactured by Milltronics. Size relative to the origin of workers may be negative or positive, depending on where the operator sets the origin. G90 is active at the beginning of each program. G90 cancels the G91. Note: The machine defaults to G90 (absolute mode) when the program starts.
372
Incremental mode (modal) (G91) This function causes the transition of the control device in an incremental mode. In this mode, all the dimensions are entered on the status of the machine in the previous block. In the case of manual data entry dimensions refer to the current state of the machine. Dimensions in G91 may be positive or negative. G91 should be used with caution. When you activate the tool offset, size, or the installation plane R zeros floating through the G92 control unit should not be in the mode of G91. XC, YC, ZC (center), AA (initial angle) and AB (end angle) is always in absolute mode. G91 cancels the G90.
373
Floating zero (G92) This command sets the working coordinate system. The situation becomes programmed tool position in the current work coordinate system. If you use this command G92 should take it as a "challenge of the provision X_ Y_ Z_.
If the machine is positioned in the P2, which is the command X1 Y1, and then issued the command G92 X0 Y0, the next time you issue the command X.5 Y.5 machine will be positioned
374
Applying this rule, you can cut the same form in several places. For more information on calling subroutines using the G92 in the notes on the M98 (p 402.) Notes on a floating zero Note 1: When using the G92 Z__ correction to the length of the instrument should be removed or taken into account the fact that they will influence the new position of the floating zero on the axis Z. G92 must not be used when the correction is on the cutting tool is activated, the control unit must always be in the mode of G40. The distance shifted by one working in the G92 coordinate system will be applied to other operating systems of coordinates, when they are activated by using the commands G54 - G59. If this is undesirable, the new G92 should be installed when changing coordinate systems. G92 settings are reset when the power and after the installation of the machine to its original position. G92 X__ Y__ can be considered as a challenge to this position X__ Y__. At power-G54 coordinate system is activated. The original values are restored after the G92 program.
Note 2: Note 3:
375
376
Feed per revolution (G95) This G-code is a modal code, giving the device control instructions on how to interpret the commands of submission - in mm or inch per revolution of the spindle. G1 F.005 will cause the displacement of the axis of 0.005 "for each revolution of the spindle. Note: To use this G-code on the machine should be optional rigid tapping.
Returning to the original level or the level of R (G98/G99) These two G-code is used only when the control device is located in one of the group of cycles axis Z (with the G73 to G89), or automatic standard programs (G24-26, G34-36). G98 causes the return of the Z group cycle at the level at which it was activated during this cycle. G99 causes the return of the Z group cycle at the current level of R. G98 X1 Y1 Z1 G81 X5 Y-4 Z-1.3 R.2 F10 X2 Y3 G99 X3 Y-1 G80
X5 Y-4
then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z1 X2 Y3 then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z1 X3 Y-1 and then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z.2 cancellation of the cycle
Here are a few specialized and non-G-code. On. / Off. cylindrical display (G107) G107 can be used when there is a rotary axis for cutting on the surface of the cylinder. Before you apply this g-code, you must install two additional parameters (MISC) for valid values: Cylindrical axis display its original position (set to 1 for X, 2 Y, 3 for Z)
377
378
379
380
Cutting width - the distance between a pass and the next. Finishing allowance is not removed in the final pass. For removal allowance should be programmed another cycle of milling. Finishing allowance is not included in the option, if the correction is turned off in the cutting tool. Note 1: For values of 'I' requires that the correction in the cutting tool has been included. If the correction of the cutting tool is included in the wrong direction (outward, not inward), a large excavation will be cleaned. Note 2: If the endpoint does not match the primary, will be added to the line from the end point to the beginning. Note 3: The feed rate and spindle speed in the geometry of the cavity is
ignored during the cleaning cycle.
Note 4: If the trajectory has a geometry that intersects another geometry, the loop will be done everything possible to clean the recess, but most likely the work will be done poorly. Note 5: The cycle may require that the holes were drilled at the points of penetration. To do this, to the point of incision observed and added to the drilling cycle.
381
382
RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf-Graph = Home screen, program-text-edit-check-Graphical Active = Actively TextVer = Test text Correction: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length: Submission: Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details: Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear
The following will be discussed on a number of special and non-G-codes. Save / Restore Settings (G990/G991) Pp Ll Qq G990 (save settings) Pp Ll Qq G991 (reconstruction parameters) G990/991 allows you to save and restore the settings using the file name C :/ RAM/Q0000Q9999. The parameters are as follows: Pp (number of core parameters, default 0) Ll (number of parameters, the default is 10) Qq (identification of the file, the default is 0). G990 and G991 have to follow the Pp, Ll, or Qq. WARNING: The line should not be other teams.
383
384
For example: Set a special G-code O9014 - 005 parameter F3 (Power) (Power) and enter a program in C :/ RAM/O9014. Each time a G5 it will be similar to calling C :/ RAM/O9014. To refer to the newly created custom code can be used three-digit number. See the M-and Gcodes on page 48, Section 2.
385
386
387
X* X*
Change of tool Includes coolant in the form of oil mist Includes coolant splash Coolant off Clamp / Brake Decompression / brake The orientation of the spindle (optional Automatic Tool Changer) Emergency Stop Check out the channel Graphic off Graphics included Scan in 3 dimensions include Scan in 3 dimensions is disabled Cone Wall Rounded wall Cleaning the deep recesses X* X*
X*
X* X* X* X*
X* X* X* X* X X X X X
388
Completion of the operator routines * These functions can be selected before moving, and after it.
Please note: The control unit receives more than one M-code line, but it is recommended to program only one M-code on the line. If a line has more than one M-code, the execution order is not defined in part, and the program can not run as expected. In general, the Mcode will be executed in numerical order, "the first M00, the latest M99, if you have not specified that they run after the operators of the movement. (See the table following Mcode on page 67, Section 4.) After switching on coolant, it runs on and off the spindle, and it does not need to program, when running the spindle. Stop the program (M00) Program execution stops on the block, which contains the M00, and the operator is given a hint to click Cycle Start (Run cycles). After clicking on the button Cycle Start (Run cycles) program execution resumes. If the M00 in line with the team moving, moving will be executed before shutdown. If the M00 is a block comment, it will be displayed as a hint. An optional stop (M01) M01 - this is the same as the M00, except that it runs only when the switch is activated by an optional stop. If the M01 is a block comment, it will appear as a prompt to the operator. Skipping the block (/) Line of code can be omitted or ignored by the control device. Insert the sign "/" (oblique line) at the start line and the activation of F5 (BSkip) (Skip block) lead to the fact that the control unit will skip that line. In the example below, F5 (BSkip) (Pass Block) is deactivated, the machine will move in first, second and third points. When the F5 (BSkip) is activated, the machine will move in first, and then the third point. Block 2 will be skipped. N1 /N2 N3 X0 Y0 X2 Y2 X4 Y0
Completion of the program (M02, M30, M99) Any one of these codes can be used to refer to the completion of the program. However, M02 and M99 are left spindle and coolant included; M30 them off. All three codes are returned to the top of the program and run when you press the button Cycle Start (Run cycles). Completion of the program - the same as the M2 or M99. 389
Coolant inc. / Off. (M07, M08, M09) With the help of these codes include coolant (M07 - oil mist, M08 - watering) before executing the command for the axis. Team off coolant (M09) will be executed after the command for the axis. Clip for rotary table (M10) This code is activated by clamping or brake for the optional rotary table. Decompression on the turntable (M11) With this code, released the brake option turntable. Note: There is an option F9 (Ctrl) "auto rotary brake" (automatic brake rotary table), which automatically turns on and off the brake.
390
391
The starting point is stored in the next parameter. 121 for the X-axis 122 Y-axis 123 for the Z-axis To create the initial angle of covering the details must be greater than 180 and less than 360 . For covering the details, starting at 0 , you should use either -0,0001 359,9999 . For covering the details, starting at 180 , you should use either 180,00001 -179,9999 . Z can also be changed in geometry. For example: P120 = 9 P127 = 1 P128 = - .0001 P129 = 180 P130 = .1 P145 = 10 F15 P121 = 0 P122 = 0 P123 = 0 P140 = .1 M94 X3 Z-1 M93 YZ plane the initial radius initial angle, covering the part finite angle Width of passage feed rate of Z feed rate with a sweep starting point the plane R Scan in 3 dimensions include gradual decrease to a Z-1, from X0 to X3 Scan in 3 dimensions is disabled
393
Example 3: Correction of the cone cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes) The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.
394
Note: The first cut at the first depth Z is always adjusted to the range of the instrument. First depth of Z should be on the surface to be cutting. The angles of the walls are described as follows, irrespective of recesses or islets.
When used on the walls of the conical spherical cutters should be used M95 EO (or M95). When using the end mill should be used M95 E1.
395
Rounded walls (M96) M96 can be used for rounding the walls in the pits or on the islands. In this command, as the parameters used by the initial angle, radius walls, the first depth, the depth and the final increment of Z. M96 should be in the loop while-wend. To use the curved walls of the tool radius, the parameter number 160 (current depth Z) and the correction of the cutting tool must be activated. Sets the M96 162 at 2, when the cycle is completed. M96 requires the use of spherical cutters. The functions of the curved walls as you use the correct rounded / tapered walls to determine the location of the first cut.
396
Example 2: The absence of correction of curved walls of the island The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no) To cut this part does not require correction tool.
Example 3: Correction of the rounded walls of the cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes) The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.
397
398
399
When using either E0 if E is not used in block M95 (or M96), the control unit will use a spherical tool on the wall. Any other E in the M95 (or M96) will inform the control unit that is used end mill. Correction rounded / tapered wall does not work with the option to end mill.
400
Turn off correction in the cutting tool in the absence of movement Turn off correction in the cutting tool Perform 5 passes Cut width = 0.1 Cleaning groove Next the depth Z The accelerated movement of the workpiece Completion of the while loop
401
1st pass
TRAJECTORY DETAILS
To clear the island of the same form should be changed to G41 G42. To perform the finishing pass to download the table tool to tool radius greater than the radius of the actual instrument used. P163 = 2 P164 = - .01 Perform two passes Adjustments to the actual size of the tool / finishing allowance for cleaning
Note: Cleaning the grooves are used to remove the allowance from the details. If programmed too many passes, you can damage the surface. It is best to use the M97 (clean grooves) to remove a few passes, and then use other means to remove the remaining material. Subroutine call (M98) The completion routines (M99) Subroutine call command (M98) can be used to run any program that is constantly stored in the memory of another program. After the execution of the called program control device will transmit back to the calling program a block of commands after the M98.
402
ATTACHMENT C 1 CYCLE
ATTACHMENT C 2 Cycle
When used with the M98 team L___ team can re-call the subroutine. Team L___ may indicate up to 999 repetitions of routines. Attachments are allowed up to 50 levels. M2 can be used instead of the M99. If the subroutine ends without M2 or M99, it will return to the calling program, as in a meeting with the M2 or M99. Training routines Sub-looks just like any other program. Specifying the M99 at the end subroutine is optional. If the program was called with the M98, will return to the M02, M30 or M99. Subroutines are entered into memory in the same way as conventional programs.
403
A For example:
= =
Team subroutine call and the team move can be made in one block. For example: X1 M98 P0200 In this example, the subroutine 200 is invoked after the move in the direction of the axis X. Sequence of the main program that calls the subroutine is as follows.
HOME PROGRAM SUB
When the subroutine is called another subroutine, it is performed in the same sequence as shown in the example above. Notes for subprograms Note 1: If the specified number of routines can not be detected, an error message 603 "Program O # # # # does not exist" (program O # # # # does not exist).
404
If the routine changes the floating zero (as a rule, G92 X0 Y0 in the first block of subroutines), it will be restored by the same amount of correction, which was when entering the subroutine. This can be useful for cutting the same shape in different places. For example: 0#### O0002 X1 Y2 G92 X0 Y0 M98 P2 (to cut the part when X1 Y2) . X3 Y5 . . M98 P2 (to cut the part with X3 Y5) . M2 M99
Note 4:When you use the call, you can call the subroutine with the full names of DOS. For example: call C: \ Test \ Parts \ XYZ.PRG Specialized M-codes Specialized M-codes can be created for user-defined function. To install a new specialized Mcode, you must first create a text program - with the number of 9020 to 9029 - which defines the new M-code. Then enter the number of new specialized section of the code in the parameter F3 (Power) (Power), after that you just created a text program. To enumerate the newly created special codes you can use three-digit number.
405
Example 1:
Establish a dedicated M-code parameter F3 (Power) (Power) O9025 at 014 and enter the program in C :/ RAM/O9025. Implementation of M14 is similar to calling in the C :/ RAM/O9025. Establish a dedicated M-code parameter F3 (Power) (Power) O9027 by 3 and enter the following G-program C :/ RAM/O9027. (to turn on the vacuum) (Pause for 1 second) (Includes a spindle, like a normal M3)
Example 2: Set 25 G4 F1 M3
406
Parametric team assignment Assignment - this is the main command in the application parameters. Symbol assignment - is an equal sign (=). Assignment operators replace the current value of the new value. For example: P1 = 1.234
In this example, the value of 1.234 assigned to the parameter 1. Therefore, each of the following commands performs the movement in the same position coordinates. X1.234, or X [P1] Note: If the assignment exceeds the number of parameters 699, it is necessary that the control device was in the mode of transmission (G10). See the list of numbers of parameters and their descriptions in the Appendix.
PB (byte option) Byte parameters typically contain values that represent the configuration of the machine. For example, the parameter range of spindle PB50 is set to 1 for the low range, 2 - and 3 for medium - to high. Byte parameters can not exceed 255. For example: PB50 = 2
407
Arithmetic Operators Below is a list of the available arithmetic operators. Operator + * ** / DIV MOD Note: Operation addition subtraction multiplication exponent division integer division balance
The value of A DIV B - a mathematical quotient A / B with a lowered fractional part or residue. Examples: 3/2 = 1.5 24/5 = 4.8 72/8 = 9.0 5.46/2.1 = 2.6 3 DIV 2 = 1 24 DIV 5 = 4 72 DIV 8 = 9 5.46 DIV 2.1 = 2
MOD returns the remainder obtained by dividing two numbers. 3 MOD 2 = 1 remainder = 1 24 MOD 5 = 4 = 4 remainder 72 MOD 8 = 0 remainder = 0 3.57 MOD 2.1 = 1.47 Fract (3.57 2.1 = .7) (.7 x 2.1 = 1.47) Relational Operators Below is a list of the available relational operators. Operator Operation
EQ or = equally NE or <> not equal LT or < less than GT or>more than LE or <= less than or equal GE or> = greater than or equal
408
The function returns a value and can be used interchangeably wherever decimal values are accepted. The following functions. Sine (SIN) returns the sine of the argument SIN [90] = 1 Cosine (COS) returns the cosine of the argument. COS [180] = -1 Tangent (TAN) returns the tangent of the argument. TAN [135] = -1 Arctangent (ATAN) returns the arc tangent of the argument. The argument must be specified in the form of fractions (eg, , 2/1 -5 / 6, ...). ATAN [1/-1] = 135 The square root (SQRT) returns the square root of the argument. SQRT [9] = 3 The absolute value (ABS) returns the absolute value of the argument. ABS [-15] = 15 An integer (INT) returns an integer argument. INT [5.5099] = 5 A random number (RND) returns an integer random number between 0 and its argument. RND [25] returns an integer> = 0 and <= 24 The natural logarithm (LN) function returns the natural logarithm of the argument. LN [10] = 2.3026 Exponential (EXP) returns the exponential argument. EXP [1] = 2.7183
409
Conditionals Centurion CNC supports two types of conditional statements. These operators are used to transfer program control from one point to another based on some condition, developed in the program. These statements - IF-THEN and WHILE-WEND. IF-THEN The operator IF-THEN - it's method of conditional execution block if the results of the expression evaluated as true. The expression must contain one of the relational operators, which can reduce the expression to true or false. If the expression is true, the THEN part of the operator IF. If the expression is false, the next line after the operator of IF-THEN. An example of the general form: If [Any] (operator) [any] [mathematical] (Relationship) [mathematical] That any action [expression] [expression] N20 IF P1 LT P2 THEN GOTO 15 N21 or N22 IF P1 <P2 GOTO 15 N21
410
Note: Word THEN optional in all cases. WHILE-WEND The second type of conditional statements is WHILE-WEND. WHILE statement contains an expression that controls the repeated execution of blocks that are between the operators WHILE and WEND. The expression that controls the repetition, must contain a set of relational operators, which reduces the expression to true or false. The expression is evaluated before the containing block. Contained units to re-run if the expression is true. If the expression is false in the beginning, the blocks are not executed. For example: N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 N25 N26 WHILE [[P2 * P3] /COS[P6]] LT P2 P6 = P6 + 1 Y [P2] Z [P3] X [P6] X1 Y0 Z0 WEND M30
In this example, the line of N25 with N20 will be repeated for as long as the WHILE expression is false. The string is then N26 will be executed instead of the N21. Note: Admitted nested loops WHILE. Operators of transfer Operators of transmission transfer control from one program section to another. This is an unconditional transfer, as expressed in the fact that when the statement is executed, control is always passed. Operators GOSUB / RETURN and CALL return control to the block N +1 after its completion, and the GOTO statement transfers control to the specified block of no return.
411
If there is more than one program N30, the transfer will happen in the first N30.
CALL statement CALL statement transfers control to the program stored in the memory of the CNC. Upon completion of the program caused or M2, M99 or M30, control is returned to the main program in the block immediately following the statement CALL. CALL format is as follows. CALL XXXX Number program LXXX The loop counter (optional)
If L is omitted, the called program will run once. The operator calls the same as the M98. Note: You do not need to subroutine calls in a separate program. You can call O # # # # in the same file. This eliminates the need for setting lessons programs. For example: X1 Y1 . . Call 2 (call O0002) . . M2 (M2 is optional) O0002 (O # # # # in the same file is preceded by a separate file, O # # # #.) X2 Y2 . . M99 (M99 is optional) Notes on the operator to call Note 1:Call subroutine allows attachments up to 50 levels. Note 2:See more details about using the G92 in the routines page 374, Section 2. Note 3:Allowed to call programs with the full names of DOS. For example: CALL S :/ XYZ / PRG.X
412
If the missing L, GOSUB program will be executed once. N1 N2 N3 N4 GOSUB 100 N5 . . . N90 M30 N100 N101 . . . N200 N201 RETURN N202
Subroutine
When GOSUB is executed in the N4, the program will move to the N100 and begin execution until you reach the N201. In the N201 control will be transferred to N5, and will be performed with a string of N5 N90. M30 stops executing the main program and starts re-execution of lines 100 through 202. Note: permitted up to 50 levels of investment routines.
413
414
Cases TANL 1st C0 = C1 = C2 = C3 = On the right Left On the right Left 2nd On the right On the right Left Left
415
Example programs using TANA and TANL N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 P90 = 0 P91 = 0 P92 = 1.5 P93 = 5 P94 = 4 P95 = 2 P96 = 5 XC arc a YC arc of a radius of the arc of a XC arc two YC arc two arc radius 2 radius of the arc tangent (is not used for the tangent line) TANA C3 or TANL C3 G2 R1.5 XC0 YC0 X [P80] Y [P81]
The calculated end-point, or TANA TANL N10 G3 R5 XC [P84] YC [P85] X [P82] Y [P83] (Calculated center and endpoints TANA) or N10 G1 X [P82] Y [P83] (Calculated endpoint TANL) N11 G2 R2 XC5 YC4 X Y end end
416
CGEN function can be used anywhere in a program to calculate the radius and the center of the arc. These calculations can be used in normal commands arc with the help of trigonometric, chamfering, rounding corners, back extension, and any other available options. Note: The direction of the arc back to the P97, so the unit can be replaced by N6 G17 G [P97] R [P82] XC [P81] YC [P80] Xe___ Ye___
Time team Centurion CNC team has the letter, which can be used to engrave serial numbers or other designations. Text cycles must be loaded by setting "Load text cycles" (Download text of cycles). After setting the parameter control unit must be reset. Bijective letter size - 1 "x 1", the printed text. All these letters can be scaled or rotated to achieve the desired size and orientation. Depth of cut is contained in the P141, the speed infeed Z - in P145, a zone of safe return - in the P140. A typical program would look like.
417
With this program you will be the inscription "MILLTRONICS MFG" at a depth of -0.2 "to 1" in block letters 1 "from the provisions of the X-4 Y.5. Text loop can also be used for engraving parameters, time and date. For example: P28 = -6.77777 TEXT [N = # 28 [34]] With this will be engraved with "N = -006.7778" (3 senior level, four junior). If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format from the settings of the machine. The serial numbers of items can be engraved as follows: TEXT [# 23 [30]] Etch the value of P23, 3 places to the left, right 0) P23 = P23 +1 (incremental counter parts) If the senior and junior level equal to 0, will engrave ascii code parameter. For example: P1 = 35 (Ascii for '#') P2 = 123 TEXT [PART # 100] # 2 [30]] With this will engrave "PART # 123". (Item number 123) If the senior and junior level = -1, engraved time (parameter # is ignored.) For example: TEXT [TIME IS # 1 [-1]] will be engraved "TIME IS 016:46:51". (Time of 016:46:51) If the senior and junior level = -2, engraved date (option # is ignored.) For example: TEXT [DATE IS # 1 [-2]] will be engraved "DATE IS 02/11/08" (date 11/02/08)
418
PRINT (Seal)
Print to print the text on the screen. PRINT can used to display text, values, time, date, etc.
419
For example: P100 = 1.235 P101 = 2.87656 PRINT [P100 = # 100 [04] P101 = # 101 [33]] shows "P100 = 1.2350 P101 = 002.877" If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format of the senior and junior categories of the settings of the machine. If LT = 0 apply the exception. If LT = 0, shows the ASCII code of the parameter. For example: P1 = 72 (ASCII H) P2 = 105 (ASCII i) PRINT [# 1 [00] # 2 [00]] shows "Hi" If LT = -1, the parameter is ignored. Time is shown in the format 0chch: mm: ss. If LT = -2, the parameter is ignored. Date shown in the format year / month / day. For example: PRINT [Time = # 1 [-1] Date = # 1 [-2]] shows "Time = 012:51:52 Date = 97/10/23" (time = 012:51:52, Date = 97/10 / 23) POPEN POPEN P0 Through team POPEN opens the file, or RS-232 output from the command DPRNT. Through team POPEN P0 opens the file for output. The file to be opened by the parameters specified in the MISC (more). If the file name in this parameter is omitted, the output will be recorded in REPORT.DAT. Through team POPEN P1 opens the serial port of an input-output to output. POPEN P2 opens the serial port input-output 2 to output. PCLOS closes the serial port input-output, which was opened by POPEN.
420
For example: DPRNT [PLEASE CLEAR THE WORK AREA] (Please clean the work area) # N writes the value For example: DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209 Z # 210] displays the current position X, Y and Z in a file or an RS-232. # N [LT] displays the parameter n with leading digits L and LSB T. For example: P100 = 1.235 P101 = 2.87656 DPRNT [P100 = # 100 [04] P101 = # 101 [33]] conclusions "P100 = 1.2350 P101 = 002.877" If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format of the senior and junior categories of the settings of the machine. If LT = 00, shows the ASCII code of the parameter. For example: P1 = 40 (ASCII () P2 = 72 (ASCII H) P3 = 105 (ASCII i) P4 = 41 (ASCII)) PRINT [# 1 [00] # 2 [00] # 3 [00] # 4 [00]] displays (Hi) If LT = -1, the parameter is ignored. Time is shown in the format 0chch: mm: ss. If LT = -2, the parameter is ignored. Date shown in the format year / month / day. For example: DPRNT [Time = # 1 [-1] Date = # 1 [-2]] shows "Time = 012:51:52 Date = 97/10/23" (time = 012:51:52, Date = 97/10/23) DPRNT can be used to create the report files relating to the production of parts, check parts of the digitization of information, etc.
421
For example: INPUT (X START POSITION) P1 The operator will be given a hint about the data to be entered.
The initial position of the X
The operator can use the data that is displayed when you press ENTER (Enter). If ESC is pressed in the operator input, the program will be terminated. Team HDW (flywheel) can be used to enter the flywheel during program execution. Maybe add a comment for a clue to the operator during the execution of commands HDW (flywheel). HDW is ignored when testing the program. For example: HDW (TOUCH THE TOOL TO THE PART) gives the following message to the operator.
The display mode of the flywheel. To complete click on <Escape>. Touch TOOL.
The operator presses the key <enter> after bringing the machine in the mode of the flywheel. If you click on <esc> flywheel mode, the program will be terminated. For manual installation and cleaning / O pins, see the following. CLR Remove the output pin. For example: CLR X7 (pin eliminates the output X 7) SET Set the output pin. For example: SET Z3 (sets the output pin Z 3)
422
Example 1: PULSE0 Z10 (removal of the output pin Z 10, a delay by the number of milliseconds specified in the optional parameter PULSEx pulse delay (ms), then setting the output pin Z10) Example 2: PULSE0 X2 P3.5 (removal of the output pin X 2, a delay of 3.5 seconds, and then setting the output pin X 2) PULSE1 Sends a pulse to the output pin For example: PULSE1 X5 (setting the output pin X 5, ut # 5, a delay by the number of milliseconds specified in the optional parameter PULSEx delay (ms), then setting the output pin X5) STO STO is similar to the command SET, except that the output pins are adjacent to each other. On each axis there are 12 output pins. For example: STO20 (setting the output pin Y 8 or 20-th output pin) CLO CLO is similar to the command CLR, except that the output pins are adjacent to each other. For example: CLO25 (removal of the output pin Z 1 or 25second output pin) PIN Pin an input Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Output 1 Output 2 off 3 Output 4 PIN refers to the pin. The axis X - is the 1000 values of the axis Y - 2000 values of the axis Z - values of 3000, etc. 4th axis 4000 4001 4002 4003 4004 4005 4006 4007 4008 4009 4010 4011 4012 4013 4014 4015 5th axis 5000 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 5013 5014 5015 6-I axis 6000 6001 6002 6003
The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis 1000 2000 3000 1001 2001 3001 1002 2002 3002 1003 2003 3003 1004 2004 3004 1005 2005 3005 1006 2006 3006 1007 2007 3007 1008 2008 3008 1009 2009 3009 1010 2010 3010 1011 2011 3011 1012 2012 3012 1013 2013 3013 1014 2014 3014 1015 2015 3015 423
Operators PIN can be used in conditional statements such as IF-THEN and WHILE-WEND. Examples: IF PIN [2017] EQ 1 THEN PB50 = 1 WHILE PIN [1005] NE 0 M62 M63 WEND P5 = P3 + PIN [2011]
IPIN IPIN applies the input pin. The argument - is the number of input pins. IPIN [32] - 32-th input pin. Only 64 input pins. IPIN [32] - is the input pin Z 8. IPIN [18] - the same as the PIN [2005], or input pin Y 6. IPIN operators can be used in conditional statements, or to assign variables. OPIN OPIN refers to the output pin. The argument - is the number of output pins. OPIN [14] - is the 14 th output pin. Total of 64 output pins. OPIN [40] - is the output pin number 4 of the 4th axis. OPIN [4] - the same as the pin [1003], or output pin 4 axis X. OPIN operators can be used in conditional statements, or to assign variables. Teams check details and digitizing PROBE1 PROBE1 can be used with any movement of the axis for a team of stickslip. The movement will be interrupted when the input pin down.
For example: PROBE1 F.01 X1.3 Y-2 Move X and Y in the direction of 1.3 and 2, respectively, for as long as the probe touches the part. PROBE2 PROBE2 can be used with any movement of the axis for a team of stickslip. The movement will be interrupted when the input pin is increased.
For example: PROBE2 F.01 X1.3 Y-2 Move X and Y in the direction of 1.3 and 2, respectively, for as long as the sensor will not release the item.
424
425
426
P2 = 0 N2 P1 = .5 P140 = .1 G31 N1 G0 X [P1] Y0 G1 Z0 G3 R [P1] AA0 AB45 Z [[.5-P1] / 5] G31 P1 = P1 + .1 IF P1 LE 2 GOTO 1 P2 = P2 +72 G68 AA [P2] I0 J0 IF P2 LT 360 GOTO 2
427
428
429
Start / End
430
N2 N3 N4 N5 N6
N7 N8 N9
431
Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 11 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer Number of tools Description of instrument Number of the next tool [Turn] X [] Y [] T [1] [ ] []
432
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [3.5 ] Z[ ] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [1.5] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
433
The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates Plane Type Length The final angle The Z-axis End F [] [Polar] [XY] [current] R [.5] AB [45] Z [] [---]
434
The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z[ ] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
435
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point) -------------------------------------------------- Sample 2A
Start / End
436
N6 N7 N8
N9 N10
437
Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 10 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X []
Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 10 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ]
438
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-1.5] Z[ ] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [1] YC [-1.5] End point The final angle [The polar] AB [-45] Z []
439
440
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 10 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 10 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
441
Start / End
The sample program EIA 2B N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 T1 M6 G0 X-1 Y1 S3000 M3 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 G42 D1 X0 F25 Y-1.5 P90 = 1 P91 = -1.5 P92 = 1 P93 = 4.4142 P94 = -1.5 P95 = 1 P96 = 1.4142 TANA C7 G3 XC1 YC-1.5 AB-45 R1 G2 XC [P84] YC [P85] R [P96] X [P82] Y [P83] G3 R1 XC4.4142 YC-1.5 AB0 G1 Y0 X-1 G40 Y1 G0 Z.1 M9 M5
442
N6
N7, N8- The central point of X, Y the first arc N9 The radius of the first arc
N10, N11 - the central point of X, Y second arc N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 Radius of second arc The radius of the arc tangent The function of the arc tangent The first arc with endpoint The tangent arc with the calculated center point and end point The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with CX4.4142 YC-1.5 and the rear angle 0 Moving the line X5.4142 Y0 Move the line in the X-1 Y0 Turn off correction in the cutting tool, the movement in the X-1 Y1 Note: Correction to the cutting tool will decrease during this movement. Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle
443
Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 9 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 9 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X The point of puncture Y Correction [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0] Y [0] [Automatic, right]
444
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 9 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY] Milling of the first arc in the direction [clockwise] R1 [1 ] XC1 [1 ] YC1 [-1.5 ] The second arc is to calculate: R2 [1 ] XC2 [4.4142] YC2 [-1.5 ] The output of the 1st arc [right] Log in during the 2nd arc right] Connecting with [arc] From the center of [right] Radius [1.4142] The direction of the arc [Clockwise] -------------------------------------------------- -
445
The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z[ ] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
446
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
447
Start / End
The sample program EIA 3A N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 T1 M6 G41 D1 S3000 M03 G65 X0 Y99 G0 Y0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 X1 F25 G2 XC2 YC0 AB135 R1 G1 AB45 R.5 G2 XC4 YC2 X5 Y2 R1 G3 XC7 YC2 X9 R2 G1 Y5 X0 Y0 G65 X99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5
448
449
450
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [1] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The polar] The radius of the arc R [1] The initial angle AA [180] End point The final angle [The polar] AB [135] Z []
451
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4] YC [2] End point [Absolute] X [5] Y [2] Z []
452
The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [5 ] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
453
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 12 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 12 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
454
Start / End
The sample program EIA 3B N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24 T1 M6 G41 D1 S3000 M3 G65 X0 Y99 G0 Y0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 X1 F25 P90 = 2 P91 = 0 P92 = 1 P93 = 4 P94 = 2 P95 = 1 TANL C3 (See the explanation of the relative values TANL C.) G2 XC [P90] YC [P91] R [P92] X [P80] Y [P81] G1 X [P82] Y [P83] G2 XC4 YC2 X5 Y2 R1 G3 XC7 YC2 X9 Y2 R2 G1 Y5 X0 Y0 G65 X99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 455
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8, N9 N10 N11, N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19
456
457
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [1] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
458
459
The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [5] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
460
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 11 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 11 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
461
The sample program EIA 4A T1 M6 G41 D01 S3000 M3 G65 X99 Y0 G0 X0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 Y-2 F25 G2 XC0 YC-3 AB-45 R1 G3 XC2.1213 YC-2.2929 AB-45 R2 G2 XC4.2426 YC-3 AB90 R1 G1 Y0 X0 G65 Y-99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5
462
463
Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- Event 1 of 10 Change of tool Tool The position tool changer [Turn] X [] Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- Event 2 of 10 Puncture Tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z Return point Gap The final depth of Z 1st depth Z The increment of Z The point of puncture X [5 ] [Gap] [.1 ] [- .375 ] [- .375 ] [1 ] X [0]
464
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-2] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [0] YC [-3] End point Clearance [The polar] AB [-45] Z []
465
The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4.2326] YC [-3] End point [The polar] Clearance AB [90] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]
466
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 10 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [-99] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 10 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
467
N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19
The sample program EIA 4B T1 M6 G41 D1 S3000 M03 G65 X99 Y0 X0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 Y-2 F25 P90 = 0 P91 = -2 P92 = 1 P93 = -3 P94 = 0 P95 = -4 CGEN G2 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] AB300 P90 = .1213 P91 = -2.2929 P92 = 2.1213 P93 = -4.2929
468
469
N24- - The coordinates of three points in the third circle N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 N37 The calculation of the third circle on the basis of three points Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated Moving the line X4.2426 Y0 Moving the line X0 Y0 Setting a withdrawal after the X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position. Cancel correction on the cutting tool Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant Turn off the spindle An example of an interactive program 4B Event 0 of 10 Installing the software The name of the program [EXAMPLE 4B] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---] Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -
470
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [25] [Cartesian] X [] Y [-2] Z [] [---]
471
472
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 10 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [-99] -------------------------------------------------- Event 10 of 10 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
473
HOME / END
The sample program EIA 5 T1 M6 G42 D1 S3000 M03 G65 X99 Y0 G0 X0 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 Y2 F25 G2 XC2 YC2 AB45 R2, R.0001 X5 YC2 AB0 R2 G1 Y0 X0 G65 Y99 G40 G0 Z.1 M9 M5 Explanation of the EIA program 5 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min) Installation of a "point to puncture X99 Y0 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position.
N3
474
475
476
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [2] YC [2] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [45] Z [] The final option is [Rounded corner] Radius [.0001 ] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [4.8284] YC [2] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- -
477
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 9 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [99] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 9 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
478
The sample program EIA 6 N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N1 N2 T1 M6 G42 D1 S3000 M3 G65 X0 Y0 X.5 Y1.5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8 G1 Z-.375 F5 X1 Y3 F25 X0 G3 XC-1.2689 YC2.2 X-3 R1.5 G1 X-4 X-6.1 Y.5 Y0 X0 X.5 Y1.5 G65 X1 Y3 G40 G0 Z.1 M30 Explanation of the EIA program, 6 Change the tool number 1 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)
479
480
Options [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 3 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates F [25] [Cartesian]
481
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 4 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [0] Y[ ] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 5 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1.5] Center of arc XC [-1.2689] YC [2.2] End point [Absolute] X [-3] Y [] Z [] The final option is [---] -------------------------------------------------- Event 6 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis F [] [Cartesian] X [-4] Y[ ]
482
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] ------------------------------------------------Event 7 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [-6.1] Y [.5] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 8 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [] Y [0] Z [] [---]
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 9 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line The feed rate Coordinates The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis End F [] [Cartesian] X [.5] Y [1.5] Z [] [---]
483
Elongation in the opposite direction [off.] -------------------------------------------------- Event 11 of 12 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic] -------------------------------------------------- Event 12 of 12 End of program Turn off the spindle Disconnect coolant Z in the tool change [Yes] [Yes] [No] [ ] [ ]
The position of X (with respect to the reference point) The position of Y (with respect to the reference point)
484
485
APPENDIX
Error Messages 001 Invalid function number (Invalid function number) Pay attention to what happened and call for technical support. It was non-existent function call to DOS. 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 File not found (File not found) The name of the file labeled as outdated, does not exist. Use the MENU. Path not found (Path not found) The specified disk or subdirectory does not exist. Too many open files (Too many open files) Check whether the Config.sys file setting FILES = 20. File access denied (access denied to file) The file can be opened only in read mode or on disk, write-protected. Invalid file handle (file is invalid feed) Memory control blocks destroyed (memory management units destroyed) Insufficient memory (Out of memory) The downloadable program is too large for available memory. Performed or verified the program is too large for the memory control unit. Try to DNC mode. Invalid memory block address (Invalid memory block address) Invalid environment (Wrong Wednesday) Invalid format (Invalid format) Invalid file access code (Invalid access code to the file) Invalid data (incorrect data) Invalid drive specified (Invalid Drive) The specified disc does not exist. Cannot remove current directory (Can not remove current directory) Pay attention to what happened and call for technical support. Cannot rename across drives (not to rename specify different drives) No more files (There are no more files) 486
APPENDIX
100
Disk read error (Error reading disk) An attempt was made to edit the file that was somehow damaged, possibly during the editing power loss occurred or an error 101. Try to edit another file to see whether the problem is only one particular file. In this case, the program must be restored. Note: This error occurs when you try to edit the dialog files created by the software SLS.
101
Disk write error - Parts memory is full (Error writing to disk - program memory to handle the full details) To avoid this error, remove the program from memory if they are not used (stored on a floppy disk). It is also necessary to monitor the amount of memory while programming. After deleting some programs from the program for the machining of parts is room for additional programs. The procedure for recovering from Error 101 (Error writing to disk - program memory to handle the full details) Enter the commands shown in CAPITALS, then click on the button ENT. 1) ENTER (should see the C :/ RAM) 2) CD .. (Change directory) 3) CD PARTS (change to the directory of programs for processing details) 4) DIR (transfer files PART) 5) DEL O # # # # (# # # # - Number of your details) NOTE: You can recover your file O # # # # of the file dialog (P # # # #), resending it. 6) Turn off the machine, then on again to reset the control unit. Use the UTILFILES-ERASE to erase the programs that are no longer needed.
NOTE: You can check how much memory programs for the machining of parts is available on the home page using the UTIL-INFO. 102 103 104 105 106 File not assigned (The file is not named) File not open (The file is not opened) File not open for input (The file is not open for input) File not open for output (The file is not open for output) Invalid numeric format (Invalid number format) 487
APPENDIX
150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162
Disk is write-protected (disk is write-protected) Check whether there is a write-protect sticker used on a floppy disk. Unknown unit (unit unknown) Drive not ready (The disc is not ready) Check whether there is a disc in the drive. Unknown command (Unknown command) CRC error in data (error in the source data) Read the disk is damaged. Bad drive request structure length (the length of the structure of the query is incorrect disk) Disk seek error (Error positioning drive) Check the wire from the control unit to the drive. Unknown media type (media type is unknown) Sector not found (Sector not found) Printer out of paper (the printer out of paper) Device write fault (error writing to the device) Device read fault (Error reading from device) Hardware failure (hardware failure) Invalid format on a floppy disk. Try using a different drive or reformat the disk. Verify proper wiring of the drive. Sharing Violation (Error Sharing) Obsolete controller software for this system (Legacy software controller for the system) Obsolete acroloop software for this system (Legacy software acroloop for this system) Obsolete keyboard software for this system (Legacy software keyboard for the system) Obsolete bit access for ncb controller (Obsolete radix selection for the 488
APPENDIX
controller unit controls the network) 186 It also appears as an error 954. Control (NCB card) not detected (control unit (ECU network card) is not detected) - occurs when power All CNC Centurion 6 and 7. The control unit is not recorded in the correct signature dual-port memory, pointing out that she attended. Reasons: A. Defective unit network management card. Two. The motherboard is installed incorrectly, so the dual-port memory is also not functioning properly. For example, a motherboard with nakristalnymi drives require a jumper at which the address of the firmware nakristalnogo drive is not stored in the address D0000 hex, such as a dual-port memory. It also appears as an error 955. Interface card not detected (interface card is not detected - there is a powerOnly Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 206 and later From the interface card has not been received by fiber-optic appropriate information which would indicate its performance. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is not attached at both ends. Two. Faulty interface board. Three. Defective unit network management cardBecause it must receive information from the interface board. 4. Defective fiber optic cable. It also appears as an error 956. Interface card communication failure (refusal of a communication channel interface card) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 238 and later Built-in network control block 3.19 or later Not received any information from the interface board for 10 pulses of the control unit, about 0.01 seconds. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is weakened. Two. Faulty interface board. Three. Defective unit network management cardBecause it must receive information from the interface board. 4. Defective fiber optic cable. It also appears as an error 957. Watchdog Failure (Failure Watchdog) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 238 and later 489
187
188
189
APPENDIX
Built-in network control block 3.19 or later Built-in interface 1.11 and later versions Interface board reported that it removed the guard circuit, since there was no information from the network management card unit for about 3 pulses of about 0.003 seconds. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is weakened. Two. Defective unit network management card. Three. Faulty interface card, as it should be informed of the board of the control unit by the network. 4. If the software does not support error number 194, the release of power to the interface board called it resets (interface card comes with watchdog disabled by the system). Five. At a minimum, it is possible that the link will work in one direction and does not work in another. Especially when each area has an independent channel, including a separate fiber-optic cable. It is assumed that this error will be very rare, especially when the "Reset Interface" will give a single error. 190 It also appears as an error 958. Unexpected control (NCB card) reset (Unexpected reset the control unit (ECU network card) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 255 and later Built-in network control block 3.23 or later The board of the control unit network is sometimes reset after power up, it's the only time when it should be dropped. REASONS: A. emission power in the board of the control unit by the network. Two. Noise on the bus reset your PC that is connected to the bus control unit reset board network. Fees keyboard version PLD AC hex (instead of the current B0 hex) allowed displacement of the tire reset the PC, making it susceptible to interference. It also appears as an error 959. Unknown PLC (Hex file) failure (failure unidentified PLC (Hex-file)) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 262 and later Built-in network control block 3.27 or later The tasks of the control unit is not serviced by a network of the last 256 pulses board unit, about 0.25 seconds. REASONS: A. The task of network management unit is stopped, which indicates that it was not properly recorded in our department software. This problem has been due to an earlier file, network control unit on a lathe Two. Some early versions of the firmware of the control unit processor network overloaded, leaving no time to complete tasks. 490
191
APPENDIX
192
It also appears as an error 960. Control (NCB card) Failure (Failure control unit (ECU network card) Centurion 6 and 7 Version of the NC 268 and later The board of network management unit did not respond for a long time. REASONS: A. Defective unit network management card. Two. NC 268-279 false versions caused this error if the key on and off the block pressed in rapid succession. Software Watchdog Error (Error Watchdog software) Only NC Centurion 8 - error described in this manual. Unexpected interface (card) reset (Unexpected reset (board) Interface) Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 289 and later Built-in network control block 3.30 or later Built-in interface 12.1 Interface board is sometimes reset after power up, it's the only time when it should be dropped. REASONS: A. Release of power on the interface board called it resets (interface card comes with watchdog disabled by the system). Division by zero (division by zero) Range check error (Error checking bounds) Stack overflow (stack overflow) Heap overflow - Insufficient RAM memory (heap overflow area - not enough memory) If you are a great program, try to execute it via RS-232 in RUN. Invalid pointer operation (operation with invalid pointer) Floating point overflow (overflow in floating point operations) Floating point underflow (disappearance of the order for floating point operations) Invalid floating point operation (invalid floating point operation) TP Overlay Error (Error rassovmescheniya TR)
193 194
491
APPENDIX
209 210 211 212 213 214 300 TP Overlay Error (Error rassovmescheniya TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) TP Object Error (Error object TR) Program already exists (program already exists) An attempt was made to use the name of an existing program. Use a different name. Invalid program number (program number is invalid) The actual number of programs are in the range from 1 to 9999. *Non-modeling programs range from 1 to 15. No programs to select from (No programs to choose from) This error can occur every time you create a menu to select the files when the file is not there. In the drive can be unformatted disk. Memory processing software components may be empty. Problem saving program (s) to disk (Problem when saving program (s) on disk) There is no disk in drive. A disk can not be a place to store additional files. In the drive can be unformatted disk. Problem loading program (s) from disk (Problem when loading program (s) to disk) The disk was removed from the drive after the installation files. Not formatted for conversational. Try text editor. (Do not formatted for interactive mode. Try to work in a text editor.) Conversational system has been corrupted (Interactive System has been damaged) Illegal event number (event number is invalid) Number of events in the interactive program is negative. Invalid tool number (Invalid number of tools) Tool number less than zero or greater than 99. Can't copy or rename a file to itself (can not rename or copy a file to itself) 492
301
302
303
304
APPENDIX
Try using a different file name. 310 File not formatted for conversational or parameters (The file is not formatted for the dialog mode or parameters) The problem in obtaining the file via RS-232. Check if there was sent the correct file. Parameter file not valid (invalid parameter file) The problem in obtaining the parameter file via RS-232. Check whether the parameters are sent. Insufficient parts storage (enough memory to store programs for processing details) Program memory is full of details to handle. Try to delete some programs from the catalog processing software components (UTILS-FILES-ERASE). Program on a floppy disk may be too large for the memory control unit. Insufficient storage for compression, unable to post the file (not enough memory for file compression, you can not send a file) Delete some programs from the program for processing details. Insufficient storage, post has been aborted (not enough memory to send interrupted) Delete some programs from the program for processing details. Out of storage space on the floppy (Going beyond the amount of memory on a floppy disk) A floppy disk is full, or there are too many programs. There is a limit to 224 files can be stored in the root directory on a floppy disk. On the drive, you can create a subdirectory, and change the path to the disk to store files in a subdirectory. This allows full use of disk space. Not enough storage to create a new file (not enough memory to create a new file) In the catalog of programs for the machining of parts is not enough space to create a new interactive program. Delete unnecessary programs to free up space. Simulator allows only 15 events (simulator only allows 15 events) Send file aborted (Sending a file is interrupted) Invalid PLC program. (Invalid PLC program) One of the files ACRO.HEX (or NCB.HEX) in the directory memory is corrupt. Error in program O. (The error in the program O.) Specialized M-code or G-code contains an error. 493
311
312
313
314
315
316
APPENDIX
or custom G code program not found. (Or a specialized program G-code not found) or custom M code program not found. (Or a program of specialized M-code not found) Invalid path or program not found for M6 tool change macro. (Path is invalid or not found a program for macro M6 tool change) In a macro tool change may include errors. Home required (Requires installation of the original position) The machine must be installed in its original position before it will happen any movement of the axes, ie MDI (manual data entry), JOG (Jog feed), HDW (flywheel), etc. X axis software limit overtravel (Move the X axis for the programmed limits) Y axis software limit overtravel (Move the Y axis for the programmed limits) Z axis software limit overtravel (Move the Z-axis for the programmed limits) A axis software limit overtravel (axis A for the transition preset limits) B axis software limit overtravel (Go B-axis for the programmed limits) C axis software limit overtravel (axis C of the transition-programmed limits) These errors are the result of reaching the limits of the programmed axis move. In the jog feed or flywheel reaches the limit of the axis of the control device will allow movement in one direction only. The program may be a mistake. You may need to modify the G92 and / or G54. Tool length is also a possible reason for the transition beyond the Z-axis.
400
X axis excess error condition (state the mismatch errors of the X axis) Y axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis Y) Z axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis Z) A axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis A) B axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis B) C axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis C) These errors are caused by the fact that the axis can not keep up with the programmed movement of the programmed speed. This error occurs only when an accelerated move? Da__ Net__ If so, check the voltage on the bus and the parameters of the accelerated filing. Other reasons may include cutting of very thick material, worn tools, low voltage 15, the parameters of deceleration / acceleration or refusal fee disk.
494
APPENDIX
413 415 Attempted to move into safe zone (Trying to move into the security zone) Can't establish DNC link while program is running (can not connect to DNC during program execution) You must stop a running program before you connect DNC Out of position, arc end point is not on the arc (out of position, the end point of the arc is not on the arc) Can't edit parameters while program is running (You can not edit the parameters at run time) You must stop the program before you edit the settings. The program is in a block or stop the supply? Controller Card Error (Error controller board) Air Pressure Error. Check air hose connection (Error air pressure. Check air hose connection) Emergency stop: Axis drive fault. Reset servo drives or power down. (Emergency Stop: Do not drive axle. Restart actuators or power off) Emergency stop condition. Reset drives or press <ESC> to clear this message. (State of emergency stop. Restart drives or click on <ESC>, to remove this message) Lube fault, Check Waylube Level (Failure of lubrication system. Check lubricant level guides) Float switch for automatic lubrication pump indicates that it is necessary to add oil to the reservoir of the automatic lubrication. Tool not found in auto tool sequence (not found an instrument in a cycle of an automatic tool changer) Check the number of the instrument in UTIL-TLCHG-SLOTS. Tool pot not up during turret movement (socket tool is not directed upwards while moving turret) Check if the switch POT UP (jack up) properly. Not at tool change position (not in a position tool changer) Try to send a command before the command G32 M6. ATC arm is not out, axis movement not allowed (Hand of the automatic tool change is not outside, moving along the axes are not allowed) Can't process auto tool change after switching to manual (can not perform 495
416 417
451
452
453
APPENDIX
automatic tool change when you switch to manual mode) 457 458 459 460 501 Move length too great for control (length of the displacement is too large to manage) (Divided into smaller segments move) X axis is in the manual mode. Push reset to enable it (X-axis in manual mode. Click on Reset to activate it) Y axis is in the manual mode. Push reset to enable it (Y-axis in manual mode. Click on Reset to activate it) Feedrate too large for control. (The feed rate is too high to control) Illegal address "#" encountered (detected an invalid address "#") The symbol in quotes ("") is not a valid address, such as X, Y, Z, R, G, etc. The block in which the error occurred is shown on the screen unit. Check this box for invalid addresses. Undefined canned cycle (not a group defined cycle) Return without gosub (Return without gosub) See the information on the return and gosub page 412Section 5. Coincident points, the start point and end point are the same on an arc without a center (Coincidence points, starting and ending points are the same on the arc without a center) The starting and ending points are the same on the arc without a center. Radius too small to span given points (radius is too small for the connection of these points) The starting and ending points are separated by a distance greater than "R". After compensation, line to arc lacks intersection (after the correction is not crossing the line with the arc) After compensation, arcs lack intersection (after correction is no crossing arcs) Unexpected file size (Unexpected file size) The control unit reads the wrong size. Parameter out of range (beyond parameter) The parameter number is less than zero. For parameters with numbers over 699, use data mode (G10, G11). Illegal program statement (Invalid operator of the program) The command in the statement of the program is not considered valid. 496
505
518
APPENDIX
519
Feedrate out of range (feed rate beyond) The programmed feed rate exceeds the value of "maximum flow rate" in the settings of the machine. The programmed feed rate can be negative. Spindle speed out of range (Spindle speed goes outside) The programmed spindle speed exceeds the value of "a range of spindle speed" in settings of the machine. The programmed spindle speed can be negative. Negative arc radius (the radius of the arc negative) An attempt was made to generate a negative radius of the arc. Negative polar radius (the radius of the negative polarity) Polar radius must be specified as a positive value. Illegal tool number (Invalid number of tools) The actual numbers of T 0, from 0 to 99. Illegal radius number (Invalid number range) The actual numbers of D - from 0 to 99. Illegal length number (the number is invalid The actual numbers of H - from 0 to 99. Invalid access code (Invalid access code) The access code does not match the settings loaded into the machine. Invalid access level (access level is invalid) Valid levels are: 0 - 4. Duplicate address' encountered (detected duplicate address) The same address was found in the same block twice, for example, X0 Y0 X.5. Colinear line to line in round corner (Collinear line to line in a rounded corner) Colinear line to arc in round corner (Collinear line to an arc of the rounded corner) Colinear arc to line in round corner (Collinear arc to a line in the rounded corner) Colinear arc to arc in round corner (Collinear arc to arc in a rounded corner) Chamfer length is <0 (Chamfer length <0) The length of the bevel should be expressed as a positive number. 497
520
521 522 523 524 525 526 527 529 530 531 532 533 535
APPENDIX
536
Can't chamfer and round the same corner (can not be chamfered and round the same corner) Select a chamfer or round the corner from him. Can't chamfer to or from arcs (impossible with a chamfer arcs) Loop counter out of range (cycle counter is outside) The maximum number of cycles to call - 999. Dwell time out of range (Pause time beyond) Probably, it was indicated a negative number. Maximum time to pause 999999999 seconds. Illegal dwell time "#" encountered (found unacceptable pause "#") Try G4 F # #. # # # #; Specify X, P or F after the G4. No axis moves are allowed on a G31 or G32 block (movements along the axes are not allowed in block G31 and G32) G31 and G32 are intended only for the displacement Z. Move X and Y move to another block. G30 Illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block (G30 Invalid return to the basic setting in block G30) It should be P2, P3 or P4 for the second, third and fourth reference point. Illegal G10 statement (Invalid operator G10) Too many digits in number (too many digits in number) The number of digits exceeds the expected for a given address. For example, G100 should have only two digits. Illegal K value for number of holes (not valid for the number of K holes) K must be a number from 1 to 1000. Nested calls or gosubs too deep (level of nested calls or commands gosub too deep) Probably, the program calls itself. Limiting investments equal to 50 calls for the programs. Comment not closed (not closed Comment) Always use "()" (double parentheses) for comments on the program. Unrecognized G code (unidentified G-code) The observed G-code is not recognized by the control device.
540 541
542
543 544
545 546
547 549
498
APPENDIX
550 Bad numeric format (Invalid number format) Expected a numeric value or a parameter value enclosed in [], then enter X, Y, Z, R, etc. Multiple decimal points (a few decimal points) A few decimal points were found in a single numerical value. Missing "]" (missing "]") Always use brackets in pairs. Missing "[" (No "[") Always use brackets in pairs. Tangent function overflow (overflow function of tangent) Trying to find the tangent of a number close to 90 Missing "/" (There is no "/") The syntax of the arctangent "ATAN" - P # # = ATAN [# / #]. Negative SQRT argument (negative argument SQRT) Unknown function (unknown function) Illegal relational operator (Invalid relational operator) Unresolved call (Indefinite call) The called program does not exist (Call # # # #). Unresolved goto or gosub (Undefined command goto or gosub) N # # # # does not exist in the program (Goto # # # #). The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "Compensated radius is too small" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "Adjusted the radius is too small") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool. The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "1st compensated radius in arc to arc is <0" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "1st corrected radius of the arc to the arc <0") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool. The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "2nd compensated radius in arc to arc is <0" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "2nd corrected radius of the arc to the arc <0") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool.
551 552 553 554 555 556 557 560 567 568 569
570
571
499
APPENDIX
572 Pocket clear is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop(Cleaning the deep recesses is not in the loop Start / end milling) Cycle-WHILE WEND Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling. Round wall is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop(Rounded wall is not located in a loop beginning / end milling) Cycle-WHILE WEND Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling. Round wall radius will not span 1st Z depth and final Z depth (radius of the curved wall is not connecting the 1st depth Z with a final depth of Z) Tapered wall is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop(Conical wall is not located in a loop beginning / end milling) Cycle-WHILE WEND Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling. Z increment is 0 (Increment of Z is equal to 0) Undefined text cycle (cycle of indefinite text) The symbol specified in the text command is not supported. Parameter Load Text Cycles (Download text of cycles) can not be installed in the PARMS-CTRL. Compensated arcs do not intersect (disjoint arcs Adjusted) Invalid floating point operation. The argument passed to the LN function was zero or negative. (Invalid floating point operation. Argument passed to the function LN, was negative or zero) Invalid floating point operation. The Operand passed to the "**" function was zero or negative (Invalid floating point operation. Operand passed to the function "**", was negative or zero) Can't set tool offsets for tool # 0 (not set correct for the tool number 0) Missing WHILE statement (Missing operator WHILE) Perhaps the end of the cycle without cutting cycle began milling.
573
574 575
576 578
579 580
581
588 601
500
APPENDIX
602 603 Missing WEND statement (Missing operator WEND) Perhaps the end of the cycle without cutting cycle began milling. Program N # # # # does not exist (Program N # # # # does not exist) The program, called as a subroutine does not exist. Check whether the called program in memory. Program N # # # # is empty (Program N # # # # empty) Performed or verified the program text is empty. Try to edit and resend the file dialog. Can't exit DNC run mode while program is running (can not exit the DNC run when the program is executed) DNC regime must be stopped before the release. 'P' expected in M98 block ("P" is expected to block M98) G20/21 not allowed in DNC Fast (G20/21 is not admissible in an accelerated mode DNC) Quill movement detected, reposition the quill to it's original position. (Moving quill was found, re-establishment of sleeve to its original position) Sampling error 800 Illegal probe block (the block is invalid sensor) Syntax error in file management. Check the format of the block. Blocks must begin with X, Y or Z, followed by one or two teams P. Missing end of pick (There is no end of instructions) The border is not closed indication. Entered the file does not complete the block boundary definition guidelines. Reversed scan segment (segment Scan Reverse) Multiple segments of the scan caused the change in the middle of the scan direction of the current scan. Missing end of scan (There is no end of scan) Segment directions was stopped before the end of the scan was determined. Must be at least two blocks determine the boundary between each scan directions. Reversed pick segment (segment reverse directions) Multiple segments indicate the direction of change caused instructions. Use multiple segments of the trial, if the desired goal.
606
607
801
802
803
804
501
APPENDIX
805 Invalid probe setup (Incorrect installation of the sensor) The input file does not begin a comment that contains three stars. Also, the following three blocks must be X, Y, Z or Y, X, Z, depending on the scanning plane. Scan origin expected (Waiting for the origin of scan) Multiple segments specifying started without specifying start scanning within a given segment. Probe file not found (File not found the sensor) Can not find the selected input file. Setup not selected (Setting is not selected) An attempt to measure without selecting a file input and output mode on the screen the sensor. Bad Z limits encountered (found unacceptable limits of Z) The maximum height of Z is less than the maximum value of depth Z. Stuck digitizing probe (probe for digitizing Jam) Digitization could reach a maximum height of Z, and contact with the workpiece still fixed. If the sensor does not actually affect the item, you may need to have it serviced. If it relates to the details, it can be omitted or increase the maximum height of Z. Input out of range (beyond entry) RS232 overrun error (The system sending data may not have the same baud rate as the CNC.) (Overflow error RS232 (The system sends the data can have the same baud rate as NC)) Check setting the baud rate with the RS-232 in the PARMS-CTRL. RS232 parity error (The system sending data may not have the same parity as the CNC.) (Parity Error RS232. (The system sends the data can have the same parity as NC)) Check the setting of parity for the RS-232 in the PARMS-CTRL. RS232 framing error (Remote system and CNC may not have the same line settings or a loose cable.) (Error crop RS232. Remote system and the CNC may not be the same configuration line or cable can be weakened)) Check the settings in the line of PARMS-CTRL for baud rate, parity and stop bits. RS232 break detected (RS232 cable may be loose.) (RS232 discovered the gap.RS232 cable can be weakened)) Check cable connections and connectors.
806
807 808
809 810
812 900
901
902
903
502
APPENDIX
950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 Obsolete controller software for this system (Legacy software controller for the system) Obsolete acroloop software for this system (Legacy software acroloop for this system) Obsolete keyboard software for this system (Legacy software keyboard for the system) Obsolete bit access for ncb controller (Obsolete radix selection for the controller unit controls the network) Control not detected. (The control device is not detected) Interface not detected. (The interface is not found.) Interface communication failure (refusal to link interface) Watchdog failure (failure Watchdog) Unexpected Control Reset (Unexpected reset the control unit) Unknown PLC Failure (Unknown refusal to PLC) Control Failure (failure control devices) Byte parameters Parameter File Version (Version parameter file) Cartesian Inch Leading Digits (Senior level Cartesian coordinate system in imperial measurements) Cartesian Inch Trailing Digits (junior level Cartesian coordinate system in imperial measurements) Cartesian Metric Leading Digits (Senior level Cartesian coordinate system to the metric system of measurement) Cartesian Metric Trailing Digits (Junior ranks of Cartesian coordinates in the metric system of measurement) Angle Inch Leading Digits (senior level in a corner of the inch system of measurement) Angle Inch Trailing Digits (junior level in the corner of the inch system of measurement) Angle Metric Leading Digits (senior level of the angle in the metric system of measurement) Angle Metric Trailing Digits (junior level of the angle in the metric system of measurement)
503
APPENDIX
024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 040 041 042 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 053 055 057 058 059 061 062 063 064 065 068 Spindle Inch Leading Digits (senior level in the spindle-inch system of measurement) Spindle Inch Trailing Digits (junior level in the spindle-inch system of measurement) Spindle Metric Leading Digits (Senior spindle discharges in the metric system of measurement) Spindle Metric Trailing Digits (Junior spindle discharges in the metric system of measurement) Feed Inch Leading Digits (senior level supply system in imperial measurements) Feed Inch Trailing Digits (Low level supply system in imperial measurements) Feed Metric Leading Digits (senior level supply in the metric system of measurement) Feed Metric Trailing Digits (Low level feeding in the metric system of measurement) RS-232 Change Line-Feed to Carriage Return Linefeed In (Changing the RS-232 line breaks to carriage return line feed) Send Carriage returns and Linefeeds at the end of each RS-232 block. (To send commands to the carriage return and line breaks after each block of the RS-232) Key-Board code (Code keyboard) Machine Version (Version of the machine) Force Front Panel Spindle (Spindle Gain from the front panel) Minimum Parts Space (minimum distance between parts) use G92 instead of G54 in the Hand-Wheel and Jog screens (using G92 instead of G54 on the screens of Hand-Wheel (flywheel) and Jog (Express delivery)) Extract programs with O # # # # # in RS-232 and Files Load (Check out the program with O # # # # # to RS-232 Files Load (Download file)) Spindle Range (Range of spindle speed) Number of ATC Pockets (The number of nests in the automatic tool changer) Resolve Programs in DNC (for GOTOs) (Identify program DNC (allows GOTO)) Disable 417 Errors (Deactivate Error 417) Door Open Switch (switch open the door) Use Small Soft Keys (Use a small soft keys) Load Tool Offsets (Download the tool offset) Use S Curves (Using S-curves) Primary Handwheel Encoder (primary flywheel sensor) Look Ahead in Run Mode (outrunning view at run time) Initial Units Inch or Metric (Proactive unit in inch or metric system of measurement) Number of Axis (Axis number) Spindle Axis (Spindle axis) 504
APPENDIX
069 070 071 072 073 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 096 097 099 100-109 110-119 120-129 130-145 146 160-175 176-183 188 189 190 200 201 Tool Change Type (Type of tool change) Run Rapid 100% (Running, accelerated the movement of 100%) Dry Run Rapid 100% (Idle, accelerated the movement of 100%) Spindle on in Dry Run (spindle turned on at idle) Tool Table Diameters \ Radius (Diameter / Radius tool table) Load Engraving Cycles (cycles Download engraving) Load Canned Cycles (Load group cycles) Check Spindle up to Speed (Check the spindle acceleration signal) Check Spindle Zero Speed (Check zero spindle speed) G18 is ZX or XZ plane (G18 - a ZX plane or XZ) Cad Type DXF or CDL (Type Cad DXF or CDL) Special Flags (Special flags) Offset Round and Tapered Walls (Correction of curved walls and conical) Full Dos File Names (The full file names DOS) Primary Serial Port (Primary serial port) COM1 Baud Rate; (COM1, baud rate in baud) COM1 Data / Stop Bits and Parity (COM1, parity and stop bits of information) COM2 Baud Rate; (COM2, baud rate in baud) COM2 Data / Stop Bits and Parity (COM2, parity and stop bits of information) Tape Start Character (The symbol starting tape) Tape Stop Character (The symbol stop tape) RS-232 Buffer Size (The size of the buffer RS232) Secondary Serial Port (The secondary serial port) RS-232_End of file character (RS-232_Konets symbol file) Power up with Block Skip On (Turn on the power when activated, blocks passage of) Power up with Optional Stop On (Power is activated when an optional stop) Display Multiple Block Lines (Show a few lines of blocks) Post M-code Table (Table future M-code) Custom G-code Table (Table specialized G-code) Custom M-code Table (Table specialized M-codes) M6 Macro File Name (file name in the macro M6) Drive on Menus (Disk menu) Report File Name (The name of the log file) Thermo Comp Axes (Temperature compensation of axles) Rapid S Curves (S-curves at an accelerated movement) Tap Up Double RPM (Cut the thread with double the number of revolutions per minute) Check Air Pressure (Check the air pressure) ATC Clockwise Coast (Movement of the tool changer to inertia in a clockwise direction) ATC Clockwise Brake (Braking device tool changer clockwise) 505
APPENDIX
202 203 204 206 209 212 213 214 215 218 219 220 221 222 223 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 275-291 294 295 296 298 300-315 320-335 338-353 354-369 370 ATC Counter Clockwise Coast (Movement of the tool changer of inertia counter-clockwise) ATC Counter Clockwise Brake (Braking device tool changer counterclockwise) Electronic Spindle Gears (electronic transmission of spindle) Show current position in E-Stop (Display the current position during emergency stop) Spindle Dac Value (value of the DAC spindle) Second Hand-Wheel Axis (The second axis of the handwheel) Probe Axis (The axis of the sensor) Probe Input (Sensor input) Cranking Factor (for hand-wheeling thru a program) (Ratio at start) (for manual movement of the program) Serial Key board (Keyboard with serial connection) European Code (European code) Door Open Axis (The axis of the door opening) Door Open Input (Log in opening the door) Door Over-Ride Axis (The axis of the abolition of the door opening) Door Over-Ride Input (Log cancel opening the door) End of Cycle Axis = 227; (The axis of the end of the cycle = 227) End of Cycle Output = 228; (The output end of the cycle = 228) Yaskawa Axis Drives (Axes drives Yaskawa) Third Hand-Wheel Axis (The third axis of the handwheel) Inverse Feed-rate in 1/Seconds or 1/Minutes (The reverse flow rate of 1/sec or 1/min) Video Mode (Video mode) Screen Blank Back Light (Lights turn off the display back) Enable Three Hand-Wheels when Conversational Programming (To activate the flywheel when the three dialog programming) Always Stop on Angles Greater Than 60 (Always stop at angles greater than 60 ) Dual Master Axis (Dual drive axle) Run Look Ahead Blocks (Blocks Perform advanced view) Foreign Extension (Foreign expansion) Blocks of Look Ahead in Fast DNC (units ahead is rooted in the view mode, DNC) Reverse Spindle in Back-Gear (reversed spindle gear looping) Check control over temperature (Check the temperature control) Remove tool lengths from graphics (Remove tool length of the charts) Utility Command (Command Center) Machine Type (Type of the machine) Mechanical Version (Version of the mechanical system) Electrical Version (Version of the electrical system) Ignore Rapids in Auto-Scale (Ignore the accelerated movement of the automatic scaling)
506
APPENDIX
371 374 375 376-391 392 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 404 405 406 410 411 413 415 416 417 418 419 Safe Zone on at Power Up (Safe area is activated when power is turned on) New Remote Hand-Wheel (The new remote handwheel) Sub Work-Coordinate System (auxiliary working system of coordinates) Machine Serial Number (Serial number of the machine) High Tool Change on Pick and Place (High tool change position in the capture and distribution) Acceleration Settling Time (Setup time overclocking) Deceleration Settling Time (Setting time of inhibition) Z Axis Scale Feed-back (Mitutoyo) (Feedback on the scale of the axis Z (Mitutoyo)) Auto Rotary Brake (Automatic rotary brake) Sort Directories by Name (Sort directories by name) Manual Pocket Clear Tool Number (number of tools to clean the deep recesses manually) Ignore Tool Radius to Large Errors (Ignore "Tool radius is too large") Front Panel Type (Type of the front panel) Aux Auger Button (Additional button for auger) Aux Setup Button (additional button to install) FeedBack on Quill Scale (feedback line sleeve) Tool Setting Any Tool, Current Tool (Set tool in any tool, the current tool) Pre Check Software Limits 0 = Run Only 1 = Always 2 = Never (Preprogrammed test limits 0 = 1 = Execute only 2 = Always Never) Remote HDW Encoder (Remote sensor wheel) Quill Scale Encoder (The sensor bar sleeve) Sharp Corners (Sharp edges) Tool Load Flag Limit Exceeded, Limit not Exceeded (Going beyond the flag download the tool, going beyond the limits do not exist) Tool Load Monitor 0 = Off 1 = E-Stop 2 = Feed Hold 3 = Block Mode On 4 = Set Flag - No Message 5 = Message Only (Download the tool sensor 0 = Disabled, 1 = 2 = Emergency Stop Stop feeding 3 = Enabled 4 = block mode Checking - No message = Only 5 posts) Tool Load Limits (Limits loading tool) Tool Load Maximums (Maximum loading tool) Cylinder Parked Axis (Cylindrical axis of the map in the original position) Cylinder Rotary Axis (Cylindrical rotary axis display) Check Spindle Gear Mismatch (Check the transmission spindle misalignment) Laser Tool Setter Pulse Length (length of a pulse laser device to adjust the tool) Tool Setting Use Work Offsets (Using the working set of corrections for the instrument) Feedhold G1 and No Spindle (Stop feeding the G1 and the absence of spindle) 507
APPENDIX
477 478 479 480 489 490 491 495 496 530 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 540 541 542 543 544 545 Watch Spindle up to Speed (Track spindle acceleration signal) Chiller Fault Axis (Axis cooling malfunction) Chiller Fault Input (Input malfunction of cooling) Tool Carousel Index Button (Button indexing rotary tool magazine) Handwheel G54-Z (flywheel G54-Z) E-Stop Option on Conversational End of Program Event (Optional emergency-stop dialog with the completion of the event program) 6 Cent RW30 Remote Handwheel Option (Optional remote flywheel Cent 6 RW30) 90 Degree Cutter Compensation (90-degree correction of the cutting tool) Restrictive Edit Key (Restrictions editing keys) Auger On Time (On Time auger) Wash-Down on Time (Closing time washing) Wash-Down off Time (Time off washing) Check Tool Door Open (Check tool at the door is open) Spindle Cool Down Time (spindle cooling time) Spindle Lube Cycle Time (cycle time lubrication of spindle) Yaskawa2 Drives (Drives Yaskawa2) Put Pot Down on Swing Arm Tool Changers (Lowering the slot in the tool changer with swinging arm) 2GearwithGearBox (2 transmission with a gear box) Check Drawbar Prox (Check the proximity switch traction rod) Yaskawa M5 drive (Drive Yaskawa M5) Machine State 0 = Nothing 1 = Verifying 2 = Program Running (State Machine 0 = None 1 = 2 = Running test program) Check Spindle in Gear (Check spindle gearing) Front Panel Flags (Flags front panel) -Definitions of bits FPFLAGS_HOLD_TOOL_CHANGE $ 01; (To stop the tool change) FPFLAGS_NOT_OVERRIDE_SWITCH $ 02; (Do not switch the feed rate) FPFLAGS_RAPID_OVERRIDE $ 04; (Rapid correction) FPFLAGS_LEDS $ 08; (LEDs) FPFLAGS_NOT_MANUAL_PANEL $ 10; (Do not hand panel) Changer Type (Device type tool changer) Pump Delay - Used on coolant through spindle (delay pump - used when applying coolant through the spindle) Check Up-to-speed2 - Copy of PB77 for use in NCB files (Check the signal razgona2 - Copy PB77 files for use in network management unit) Rotary Brake Delay - Copy of R_RotaryBrakeDelay for the NCB (Rotational latency brakes - copy R_RotaryBrakeDelay for control network) Up-to-speed Axis (The axis of acceleration) 508
APPENDIX
552 554 555 Up-to-speed Input (Signal input acceleration) Coolant Through Code - Used in NCB files for coolant through spindle (ID Coolant - Use file control block chain for the coolant through the spindle) Auto Rotary Brake2 - Copy of PB397 (Automatic rotary brake 2 - A copy of the PB397)
509
The actual parameters It should be very careful when writing to any settings other than Custom parameters P00P99. P00-P99 User Parameters (Custom Settings) P100P111 P112P139 Probe Parameters (Parameters of the sensor) Unassigned (Not assigned) P160P170 Unassigned (not assigned)
P140 R plane (plane R) P141 Final Z depth (final depth of Z) P142 Z initial level (initial level Z) P143 Z increment (Increment of Z) P144 First Z depth (The first depth Z) P145 Z feedrate (feed speed Z) P146 Peck up increment (Step periodic output bits) P147 Peck clearance (gap periodic output bits) P148 Dwell 1 (a pause) P149 Dwell 2 (Pause 2) P150 Pocket radius (radius of the deep recesses) P151 X pocket dimension (size deep groove X) P152 Y pocket dimension (size deep groove Y) P153 XY finish stock (Finishing allowance XY) P154 Z finish stock (Finishing allowance Z) P155 Cut width (width of cut) P156 Bolthole radius (radius of the bolt holes) P157 Bolthole start angle (the angle of initial bolt holes) P158 #holes in 360 degrees (number of holes at 360 degrees) P159 #holes to be made in Bolthole (number of holes that needed to be done in a hole under the bolt)
P171 Holes to be made in drill cycles "K" (The holes that need to be run in cycles of drilling) P172 Mirror position axis 1 (X) (mirroring the position of an axis (X)) P173 Mirror position axis 2 (Y) (Mirror 2 position of the axis (Y)) P174 Mirror position axis 3 (Z) (Mirror 3 position of the axis (Z)) P175 Mirror position axis 4 (A) (mirroring the position of the axis 4 (A)) P176 Mirror position axis 5 (B) (mirroring the position of the axis 5 (B)) P177 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P178 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P179 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P180 Scale position axis 1 (X) (Regulation scaling axis 1 (X)) P181 Scale position axis 2 (Y) (Regulation scaling axis 2 (Y)) P182 Scale position axis 3 (Z) (3-axis position of the zoom (Z)) P183 Scale posiiton axis 4 (A) (4-axis position of the zoom (A)) P184 Scale position axis 5 (B) (5-axis position of the zoom (B)) P185 Scale position opt. axis (the axis position of the zoom optional) P186 Scale position opt. axis (the axis position of the zoom optional) P187 Scale position opt.axis (optional axis position of the zoom) P188 Scale factor axis 1 (X) (scale factor 1 axis (X))
510
APPENDIX
P189 Scale factor axis 2 (Y) (2-axis scaling factor (Y)) P190 Scale factor axis 3 (Z) (3-axis scaling factor (Z)) P191 Scale factor axis 4 (A) (4-axis scaling factor (A)) P192 Scale factor axis 5 (B) (5-axis scaling factor (B)) P193 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P194 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P195 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P196 Rotate I position (Rotate position I) P197 Rotate J position (Rotate position J) P198 Angle of rotation (Angle) P199 Auto Routines Plunge / Ramp (Automatic standardized incision / overclocking) P200 Previous position (X) (Previous position (X)) P201 Previous position (Y) (Previous position (Y)) P202 Previous position (Z) (Previous position (Z)) P203 Previous position (A) (Previous position (A)) P204 Previous position (B) (Previous position (B)) P205 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional) P206 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional) P207 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional) P208 Current position (X) (current position (X)) P209 Current position (Y) (The current position (Y)) P210 Current position (Z) (The current position (Z)) P211 Current position (A) (The current position (A)) P212 Current position (B) (The current position (B)) P213 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional) P214 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional) P215 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional) P216 Previous machine (X) (Previous machine (X)) P217 Previous machine (Y) (Previous machine (Y)) P218 Previous machine (Z) (The previous machine (Z)) P219 Previous machine (A) (The previous machine (A)) P220 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P221 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P222 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P223 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional) P224 Current machine (X) (Current machine (X)) P225 Current machine (Y) (Current Machine (Y)) P226 Current machine (Z) (Current machine (Z)) P227 Current machine (A) (Current Machine (A)) P228 Current machine (B) (Current Machine (B)) P229 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional) P230 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional) P231 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional) P232 Work offset axis 1 (X) (Operating a correction of the axis (X)) P233 Work offset axis 2 (Y) (Working Correction axis 2 (Y)) P234 Work offset axis 3 (Z) (Working Correction axis 3 (Z)) 511
APPENDIX
P235 Work offset axis 4 (A) (Working Correction axis 4 (A)) P236 Work offset axis 5 (B) (Correction Working axle 5 (B)) P237 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional) P238 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional) P239 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional) P240 Tool offset axis 1 (X) (Correction to the tool axis 1 (X)) P241 Tool offset axis 2 (Y) (Correction to the tool axis 2 (Y)) P242 Tool offset axis 3 (Z) (Correction to the tool axis 3 (Z)) P243 Tool offset axis 4 (A) (Correction to the tool axis 4 (A)) P244 Tool offset axis 5 (B) (Correction to the tool axis 5 (B)) P245 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional) P246 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional) P247 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional) P248 Arc radius (radius of the arc) P149 Arc I value (The quantity I arc) P250 Arc J value (The value of J arc) P251 Feedrate (feed rate) P252 Dwell (Pause) P253 Spindle speed (RPM spindle) P254 Temporary X position (the position of Interim X) P255 Temporary Y position (the position of Interim Y) P256 Temporary Z position (Temporary Regulation Z) P257 Temporary A position (temporary position A) P258 Temporary axis position (the position of Interim axis) P259 Temporary axis position (the position of Interim axis) P260 Active tool number (number of active tool) 512 P261 Active tool radius (radius of the active tool) P262 Active tool length (length of the active tool) P263 Active radius offset number (number correction to the radius of the active tool) P264 Active length offset number (number correction to the length of the active tool) P265 Canned cycle active (The group is active cycle) P266 Zone status (status area) P267 Unit ratio (ratio of units) P268 Pending tool (expected tool) P269 Unused (not used) P270 Temporary I (Temporary I) P271 Temporary J (Temporary J) P272 Temporary K (Temporary K) P273 Third axis rotation angle (Angle of rotation of the third axis) P274P282 P283P285 Rotation table (Turntable) Unused (not used)
P286- Rotation coordinates (The coordinates of the rotation) P292 P293P299 Unassigned (not assigned)
P300 Modal 00 (modal 00) P301 Modal 01 (modal 01) P302 Modal 02 (modal 02) P303 Modal 03 (modal 03) P304 Data mode (Data Mode) P305 H offset direction (direction of the correction H) P306 Interpolate (Interpolation) P307 Coordinates (coordinates) P308 Active plane (active plane)
APPENDIX
P309 Cutter compensation (correction to the cutting tool) P310 Canned cycle (Group cycle) P311 Dimension (Size) P312 Feed unit (Supply unit) P313 Spindle unit (Knot Spindle) P314 Spindle direction (direction of rotation of the spindle) P315 Linear unit (Linear node) P316 Scale (Scale) P317 Rotate (turn) P318 Mirror (Mirror) P319 Work system (Operating System) P320 Primary (Primary) P321 Secondary (Secondary) P322 Tertiary (Tertiary) P323 Return plane (plane of the return) P324 Tapping (Tapping) P325 Custom code (custom code) P326 Custom M-code (Specialized Mcode) P327 Custom G-code (specialized Gcode) P328 Feed per Rev (wait for marker) (feed per revolution (waiting for the token)) P329 Feedrate override Lock (Lock feedrate) P330 Spindle override Lock (Lock correct spindle speed) P331P334 Unassigned (not assigned)
P348P349 P350P361 tool) P362P363 P364 P365 P366 P367P368 P369 P370 P371P399
Unassigned (Not assigned) Used in tool setting software (Used in the software configuration Unassigned (not assigned) Draw Bar Delay used in tool change macros (delay pulling the rod used in a macro tool change) Feed per Minute Feedrate (feed rate, feed per minute) Feed per Rev Feedrate (feed rate, feed per revolution) Unassigned (not assigned) Job time (time of manufacturing one piece) True tool number (the true number of tools) Unassigned (not assigned)
P335 Hard Tap Fudge Factor (The configuration parameter rigid tapping) P336P343 Unassigned (not assigned)
P344 Inverse Time Feedrate (feed rate with time delay) P345 Bore Type (Type of Boring) P346 G76 Orient Bore Angle (G76 angle orientation bore) P347 G76 Orient Bore Distance (G76 Distance orientation boring) 513
P400 Work G92 axis 1 (X) (Working one axis (X) G92) P401 Work G92 axis 2 (Y) (working Axis 2 (Y) G92) P402 Work G92 axis 3 (Z) (working 3 axis (Z) G92) P403 Work G92 axis 4 (A) (Working Axis 4 (A) G92) P404 Work G92 axis 5 (B) (Working axis 5 (B) G92) P405 Work G92 optional axis (Working optional axis) P406 Work G52 axis 1 (X) (Working one axis (X) G52) P407 Work G52 axis 2 (Y) (working Axis 2 (Y) G52)
APPENDIX
P408 Work G52 axis 3 (Z) (working 3 axis (Z) G52) P409 Work G52 axis 4 (A) (Working axis 4 (A) G52) P410 Work G52 axis 5 (B) (Working axis 5 (B) G52) P411 Work G52 optional axis (Working optional axis) P412 Work coordinate a (X) (Operating a coordinate (X)) P413 Work coordinate a (Y) (Operating a coordinate (Y)) P414 Work coordinate a (Z) (the coordinate of a Working (Z)) P415 Work coordinate 1 (A) (Working coordinate 1 (A)) P416 Work coordinate 1 (B) (Working coordinate 1 (B)) P417 Work coordinate an opt. axis (Working a coordinate axis optional) P418 Work coordinate 2 (X) (Working coordinate 2 (X)) P419 Work coordinate 2 (Y) (2 Working coordinate (Y)) P420 Work coordinate 2 (Z) (Working coordinate 2 (Z)) P421 Work coordinate 2 (A) (Working coordinate 2 (A)) P422 Work coordinate 2 (B) (Working coordinate 2 (B)) P423 Work coordinate two opt. axis (Working two coordinate axis optional) P424 Work coordinate 3 (X) (Working coordinate 3 (X)) P425 Work coordinate 3 (Y) (Working three coordinate (Y)) P426 Work coordinate 3 (Z) (Working coordinate 3 (Z)) P427 Work coordinate 3 (A) (Working coordinate 3 (A)) P428 Work coordinate 3 (B) (Working coordinate 3 (B)) P429 Work coordinate 3 opt. axis (Working three coordinate axis optional) P430 Work coordinate 4 (X) (Working coordinate 4 (X)) 514 P431 Work coordinate 4 (Y) (4 Working coordinate (Y)) P432 Work coordinate 4 (Z) (Working coordinate 4 (Z)) P433 Work coordinate 4 (A) (Working coordinate 4 (A)) P434 Work coordinate 4 (B) (Working coordinate 4 (B)) P435 Work coordinate 4 opt. axis (Working optional 4-axis coordinate) P436 Work coordinate 5 (X) (Working coordinate 5 (X)) P437 Work coordinate 5 (Y) (5 Working coordinate (Y)) P438 Work coordinate 5 (Z) (Working coordinate 5 (Z)) P439 Work coordinate 5 (A) (Working coordinate 5 (A)) P440 Work coordinate 5 (B) (Working coordinate 5 (B)) P441 Work coordinate 5 opt. axis (Working optional five-axis coordinate) P442 Work coordinate 6 (X) (Working coordinate 6 (X)) P443 Work coordinate 6 (Y) (6 Operating coordinate (Y)) P444 Work coordinate 6 (Z) (Working coordinate 6 (Z)) P445 Work coordinate 6 (A) (Working coordinate 6 (A)) P446 Work coordinate 6 (B) (Working coordinate 6 (B)) P447 Work coordinate 6 opt. axis (Working optional 6-axis coordinate) P448 Tool change offset (X) (Correction tool change (X)) P449 Tool change offset (Y) (Correction tool changer (Y)) P450 Tool change offset (Z) (Correction tool changer (Z)) P451 Tool change offset (A) (Correction tool change (A)) P452 Tool change offset (B) (Correction tool change (B)) P453 Tool chg. offset opt.axis (Correction tool changer optional axis)
APPENDIX
P454 Positive safe zone (X) (Positive safety zone (X)) P455 Positive safe zone (Y) (A positive safety zone (Y)) P456 Positive safe zone (Z) (Positive safety zone (Z)) P457 Positive safe zone (A) (positive safety zone (A)) P458 Positive safe zone (B) (positive safety zone (B)) P459 Positive safe zone opt. (A positive safety zone axis optional) P460 Negative safe zone (X) (negative safety zone (X)) P461 Negative safe zone (Y) (negative safety zone (Y)) P462 Negative safe zone (Z) (negative safety zone (Z)) P463 Negative safe zone (A) (Negative safe zone (A)) P464 Negative safe zone (B) (negative safety zone (B)) P465 Negative safe zone opt. (The negative safety zone axis optional) P466 Text Rotation Angle (angle of rotation of the text) P467P473 Unassigned (not assigned) P512 P513 P514 milling) P515 cut) P516 CutIncrement (increment of cut) RufCutType (type rough cut) Start Mill Options (Options start RufCutDepth (roughing depth of Island (Island)
P517- Used in Autoroutines P527 (Used in automatic standard programs) P522 Ramp Angle in Autoroutines (canting angle standard in automatic programs) P528P697 Unassigned (not assigned)
P698 Parts Counter Increment (step counter parts) P699 Parts Counter (Counter parts) P700P703 Unassigned (not assigned)
P704 Power on Feedrate (The inclusion of the feed rate) P705P789 Unassigned (not assigned)
P474 Current Max Feedt (current maximum flow rate) P475 R_LogBeatsSkip (Skipping R_LogBeats) P476P494 Unassigned (not assigned)
P495 ToolChangeSpacing (tool change intervals) P496P509 P510 P511 Unassigned (not assigned) StartBlock (Top of unit) EndBlock (end unit) 515
P790 Spindle range 1 (Range of spindle 1) P791 Spindle range 2 (Range of spindle speed 2) P792 Spindle range 3 (range of rotation of the spindle 3) P793 Spindle Range 4 (Range of spindle 4) P794 Spindle Range 5 (range of rotation of the spindle 5) P795 Spindle Range 6 (range spindle 6) P796 Spindle Range 7 (range spindle 7) P797 Spindle Range 8 (Range of spindle speed 8)
APPENDIX
P798 Max Graph Size (Maximum Graphics) P799P811 P812 P814 P815P816 Unassigned (not assigned) Block Rate (frequency blocks) Cad Epsilon (Epsilon Cad) Unassigned (not assigned) P893 Soft Start Delay (Delayed soft start) P894 Clamped Feedrate (fixed flow rate) P895 Cranking Max ipm (Maximum number of inches / rev at startup) P896 Handwheel Encoder PPU (The number of pulses / rev encoder wheel) P897 Cranking Minutes Per Turn (The number of minutes / v at startup) P898 Screen Blank Time (Time to turn off the screen) P899 Digitizing Enable (Activating otsifroki) P900P962 Unassigned (Not assigned)
P817 Spindle Encoder PPU1 (The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 1) P818 Actual Spindle RPM (actual spindle speed) P819P839 Unassigned (not assigned)
P840 Pulse Delay (Delay time pulse) P841 Max Spindle RPM (Maximum spindle speed) P842 Tapping Ramp Low Gear (first linear channel for tapping) P843 Spindle Acceleration Ramp (linear acceleration of the spindle) P844 Spindle Deceleration Ramp (linear deceleration of spindle) P845P849 Unassigned (not assigned)
P850 ADC Sample (Sample ADC) P851 ADC Scale (Scale ADC) P852 ADC Value (value of the ADC) P853 ADC Trigger (Trigger ADC) P854 Tapping Ramp High Gear (upper linear channel with tapping) P855 Spindle Encoder PPU2 (The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 2) P856P892 Unassigned (not assigned)
P963 Max Corner Deviation (Maximum deviation angle) P964 Unassigned (Not assigned) P965 SpindleScale (Fraction of full spindle dac) (Scaling the spindle (the spindle part of the full DAC)) P966 Minimum Block Time (seconds, min time when not in fast DNC) (Minimum time unit (seconds, minutes. Time is not in an accelerated mode DNC)) P967 Unassigned (not assigned) P968 Minimum Linear Feed AccDec (Min. Speed / acceleration line feed) P969 Minimum Rotary Feed AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration rotating feed) P970 Minimum Linear Rapid AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration of the linear accelerated movements) P971 Minimum Rotary Rapid AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration rotating fast movement) P972 Quill Epsilon (Epsilon sleeve) P973 Front Panel Base Port (main port of the front panel) P974 Quill Scale PPU (The number of pulses / inch ruler sleeve) 516
APPENDIX
P1012 Velocity away from home (X) (The speed in the direction from the initial position (X)) P1013 Velocity toward marker (X) (The rate of momentum in the direction of the marker (X)) P1014 Encoder multiplier (X) (Multiplier detector (X)) P1015 Slow jog velocity (X) (Jog at a slow flow rate (X)) P1016 Slow jog acc / dec (X) (Acceleration / deceleration jog feed at a slow speed (X)) P1017 Rapid jog velocity (X) (Jog feed at high speed (X)) P1018 Rapid jog acc / dec (X) (Acceleration / deceleration jog feed at high speed (X)) P1019 In position (X) (The position (X)) P1020 G00 unidirectional (X) (G00 Unidirectional (X)) P1021 G60 unidirectional (X) (G60 Unidirectional (X)) P1022 Backlash (X) (The gap (X)) P1023 Excess error (X) (Error error (X)) P1024 Rotary = 0 Linear = 1 (X) (Pie = 0, linear = 1 (X)) P1025 English Lead (X) (Senior level, the English system (X)) P1026 English Trail (X) (Least significant bit, the English system (X)) P1027 Metric Lead (X) (Senior level, the metric system (X)) P1028 Metric Trail (X) (Least significant bit, the metric system (X)) P1029 Jog Key Direction (X) (Direction buttons jog feed (X)) P1030- Unassigned (X) (not assigned) P1040 P1041 Home Marker Switch (X) (Home Switch = 0, Marker = 1) (Switch the starting position marker pulse (X)) (switch initial position = 0, a marker 517
P975P999
P1000- Axis 1 Address (X) P1099 (Address 1 axis (X)) P1100- Axis 2 Address (Y) P1199 (Address of axis 2 (Y)) P1200- Axis 3 Address (Z) P1299 (Address the 3 axis (Z)) P1300- Axis 4 Address (A) P1399 (Address of axis 4 (A)) P1400- Axis 5 Address (B) P1499 (Address 5-axis (B)) P1000 Axis address label (X) (address label axis (X)) P1001 Pulses per unit (X) (number of pulses per unit (X)) P1002 Home position (X) (Starting position (X)) P1003 Home direction (X) (initial direction (X)) P1004 Positive limit (X) (positive limit (X)) P1005 Negative limit (X) (negative limit (X)) P1006 Maximum feed (X) (maximum feed rate (X)) P1007 Dry run feed (X) (Filing at idle (X)) P1008 Rapid velocity (X) (for fast moving speed (X)) P1009 Rapid acc / dec (X) (acceleration / acceleration when moving fast (X)) P1010 Home sequence (X) (loop back to the original position (X)) P1011 Velocity toward home (X) (The speed in the direction of the initial position (X))
APPENDIX
pulse = 1) P1042 G28 reference point (X) (G28 reference point (X)) P1043 G30 reference point 2 (X) (G30 control point 2 (X)) P1044 G30 reference point 3 (X) (G30 reference point 3 (X)) P1045 G30 reference point 4 (X) (G30 reference point 4 (X)) P1046 Max Handwheel Error (X) (Maximum error of the flywheel (X)) P1047- Unassigned (X) (not assigned) P1048 P1049 P1050 Feed Back (X) (Feedback (X)) Invert Handwheel (X) (non-zero = invert handwheel direction) (Check the flywheel (X)) (non-zero value is the inverse direction of the flywheel) P1051 Gain Proportional (X) (Proportional gain (X)) P1052 Gain Velocty (X) (Growth rate (X)) P1053 Gain Acceleration (X) (growth acceleration (X)) P1054 Gain Handwheel (X) (Enhancement of the flywheel (X)) P1055 Feed S-Curve Acc \ Dec (X) (Scurve acceleration and deceleration when applying (X)) P1056 Rapid S-Curve Acc \ Dec (X) (Scurve acceleration and deceleration at the accelerated movement (X)) P1057- Unassigned (X) (not assigned) P1099 P1100- Same as above only for (Y) axis P1199 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (Y)) P1200- Same as above only for (Z) axis P1299 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (Z)) 518
P1300- Same as above only for (A) axis P1399 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (A)) P1400- Same as above only for (B) axis P1499 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (B)) P1500 Unassigned (not assigned) P1501 Software Version (Software Version) P1502- Unassigned (not assigned) P1503 P1504 Turret Pocket Count (Count of nests in the turret) P1505- Unassigned (not assigned) P1554 P1555 Current Pocket (Time slot)
P1556- Tool Slots for swing arm style tool P1595 changers (Hole tool tool changer with swinging arm) P1596- Unassigned (not assigned) P1598 P1599 Spindle Orient Delay (Delay of spindle orientation) P1600- Thermo Degrees per Volt P1607 (The number of thermal degrees per volt) P1608- Thermo Inches per Volt P1615 (The number of thermal inches per volt) P1616- Thermo Inverse Growth per P1623 Degree (volume growth in the reverse thermal degrees)
APPENDIX
P1624- Thermo Position Sensor P1631 (The thermal position sensor) P1632- Thermo Voltage Reference P1639 (Thermal voltage reference) P1640- Thermo Position Reference P1647 (The thermal reference point position) P1648- Unassigned (Not assigned) P1699 P1700- Security Codes P1799 (Security codes) P1800- Unassigned (not assigned) P1999 P2000P2099 P2100P2199 Tool Radii 0 .. 99 (The radii of the tool 0 .. 99) Tool Lengths 0 .. 99 (Tool length 0 .. 99)
519